Instruction Manual
DZ-MV550A
DZ-MV580A
DZ-MV550A
DZ-MV580A
HITACHI AMERICA, LTD.
HOME ELECTRONICS DIVISION
900 Hitachi Way
Chula Vista, CA 91914-3556
Service Hotline: 1-800-HITACHI
(1-800-448-2244)
HITACHI CANADA LTD.
DIGITAL MEDIA DIVISION
2495 Meadowpine Blvd.
Mississauga, Ontario L5N 6C3
CANADA
Service Direct: 1-800-HITACHI
(1-800-448-2244)
DVDCAM PC Software Support Center
URL http://dvdcam-pc.support.hitachi.ca/
Thank you for buying a Hitachi product. Please take time to become familiar with the manual and how it
is set up. Keep it handy for future reference.
Be sure to read page 187 before unpacking the provided CD-ROM.
The illustration of DZ-MV550A is shown on the front cover of this instruction
manual. The method for operating the DZ-MV550A is the same as that for
DZ-MV580A.
This manual was printed
with soy based ink.
Printed on recycled paper
Printed in Japan OS-H(I)
QR35303 ©Hitachi, Ltd. 2004
Important Information
For Your Safety
The power switch turns the DVD video camera/recorder on and off, leaving the date/time feature unaffected. If the
camera/recorder is to be left unattended for a long period of time, turn it off.
WARNING : TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
WARNING : TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, USE THE
RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES ONLY.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, BE
SURETOUSETHESPECIFIEDACADAPTER/CHARGER
(DZ-ACS1).
The DVD video camera/recorder and AC adapter/ Identifications of caution marks
charger have the following caution marks.
This symbol warns the user that
uninsulated voltage within the unit
may have sufficient magnitude to
cause electric shock. Therefore, it is
dangerous to make any kind of contact
with any inside part of this unit.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol alerts the user that
important literature concerning the
operation and maintenance of this unit
has been included. Therefore, it should
be read carefully to avoid any
problems.
Precautions
WARNING: Many television programs and films
are copyrighted. In certain circumstances, copy-
right law may apply to private in-home
videotaping of copyrighted materials.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION
This product contains a laser diode of higher
classthan1.Toensurecontinuedsafety,donot
removeanycoversorattempttogainaccessto
the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to
qualified personnel.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
The liquid crystal display (LCD) panel is made
by highly precise technology. More than 99.99%
of its picture elements (pixels) are effective, but
some (less than 0.01%) may appear as colored
bright dots. This does not indicate a fault as the
LCD panel stretches the limits of current
technology.
2
Warning: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15ofthe FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ TV technician for help.
Caution to the user: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® 98 Second Edition, Windows® Me, Windows® 2000
Professional, and Windows® XP are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Intel®, Pentium® Processor, and Celeron® Processor are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
IBM® and PC/ AT® are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Other company names and product names listed are trademarks or brand names belonging to each
individual company.
SD logo is a trademark.
3
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
Inadditiontothecarefulattentiondevotedtoqualitystandardsinthemanufactureofyourvideoproduct, safetyisamajor
factor in the design of every instrument. But, safety is your responsibility too.
This page lists important information that will help to assure your enjoyment and proper use of DVD video camera/
recorder and accessory equipment. Please read it carefully before operating your video product and keep it in a handy
place for future reference.
7
Ventilation — Slots and openings in the cabinet are
providedforventilationtoensurereliableoperationof
the video product and to protect it from overheating.
These openings mustnotbeblocked or covered. The
openings should never be blocked by placing the
video product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar
surface. This video product should never be placed
near or over a radiator or heat register. This video
product should not be placed in a built-in installation
such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation
is provided or the video product manufacturer's
instructions have been followed.
INSTALLATION
1
Read and Follow Instructions — All the safety and
operating instructions should be read before the
video product is operated. Follow all operating and
use instructions.
m
e
ko
a
lb
u
m
c
a
t
b
o
o
k
MOMO
a
lb
u
m
y
o
h
s
in
a
r
is
h
y
o
h
s
in
a
r
is
h
a
s
h
in
ka
b
u
s
h
iki
Zo
o
Do
c
t
e
r
Zo
o
Do
c
t
e
r
t
a
d
a
s
h
iig
e
n
ko
u
P
a
r
t
1
P
a
r
t
2
y
a
ka
m
a
s
h
ii
W
h
y
?
m
it
o
n
o
t
a
d
a
s
h
iig
e
n
ko
u
a
u
o
t
o
m
o
t
e
r
n
u
rie
m
o
d
t
h
e
r
m
it
o
m
it
o
h
ir
a
y
a
m
o
a
kiko
s
a
s
a
ki
a
ke
m
i
h
r
ie
y
o
u
ji
s
e
t
u
ko
k
i
m
i
o
ig
a
r
a
s
h
i
ku
r
o
k
a
k
u
r
a
i
ku
s
a
n
o
o
o
m
o
r
i
m
a
t
u
d
a
ie
t
n
g
a
fu
g
a
n
fu
g
a
n
g
a
u
n
fu
f
g
a
n
g
a
u
n
fu
f
a
n
g
fu
2
3
4
Retain Instructions — The safety and operating
instructions should be retained for future reference.
c
h
is
e
c
h
is
e
c
h
is
e
c
h
is
e
c
h
is
e
ke
1
y
ke
2
y
ke
3
y
ke
4
y
ke
5
y
e
b
is
u
e
b
is
u
m
o
m
o
m
o
m
o
m
o
m
o
ju
n
kaiku
2
n
n
y
a
n
ko
o
ku
b
y
o
m
id
3
o
r
i
m
e
t
s
u
ki
m
a
m
e
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
1
8
Attachments — Do not use attachments unless
recommended by the video product manufacturer as
they may cause hazards.
Heed Warnings — Comply with all warnings on the
video product and in the operating instructions.
Power Sources — This video product should be
operatedonlyfromthetypeofpowersourceindicated
on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of
powersupplytoyourhome,consultyourvideodealer
or local power company. Forvideo products intended
to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer
to the operating instructions.
Caution: Maintain electrical safety. Powerline operated
equipment or accessories connected to this unit should
bear the UL listing mark or CSA certification mark on the
accessory itself and should not have been modified so as
to defeat the safety features. This will help avoid any
potential hazard from electric shock or fire. If in doubt,
contact qualified service personnel.
5
Overloading — Do not
overload wall outlets and
extension cords as this can
result in a risk of fire or electric
shock. Overloaded AC outlets
9
WaterandMoisture—Donotusethisvideoproduct
near water — for example, near a bath tub, wash
bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement,
or near a swimming pool, and the like.
and extension cords are
dangerous, and so are frayed
power cables, damaged or
cracked wire insulation and
broken plugs. They may result in a shock or fire
hazard. Periodically examine the cord and have it
replaced by your service technician if appearance
indicates damage or deteriorated insulation.
10 Accessories—Donotplacethisvideoproductonan
unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The
video product may fall, causing serious injury to a
child or adult, and serious damage to the appliance.
Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the
video product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer's instructions, and should
use a mounting accessory recommended by the
manufacturer.
6
Power-Cord Protection — Power-supply cords
should be routed so that they are not likely to be
walkedonorpinchedbyitemsplaceduponoragainst
them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point where they
exit from the appliance.
4
11 Anapplianceandcartcombination
should be moved with care. Quick
stops,excessiveforce,anduneven
surfaces may cause the appliance
and cart combination to overturn.
SERVICE
16 Servicing — Do not attempt to service this video
product yourself as opening or removing covers may
expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
17 ConditionsRequiringService— Unplug this video
product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to
qualified service personnel under the following
conditions.
12 Power Lines — An outside antenna system should
not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines
or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can
fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing
an outside antenna system, extreme care should be
taken to keep from touching or approaching such
power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.Installinganoutdoorantennacanbehazardous
and should be left to a professional antenna installer.
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.
b. Ifliquidhasbeenspilled, orobjectshavefalleninto
the video product.
c. If the video product has been exposed to rain or
water.
d. If the video product does not operate normally by
following the operating instructions. Adjust only
those controls that are covered by the operating
instructions. Improper adjustment of other
controls may result in damage and will often
require extensive work by a qualified technician to
restore the video product to its normal operation.
e. If the video product has been dropped or the
cabinet has been damaged.
USE
13 Cleaning — Unplug this video product from the wall
outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or
aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
14 Object and Liquid Entry — Never push objects of
any kind into this video product through openings as
theymaytouchdangerousvoltagepointsorshort-out
partsthatcouldresultinafireorelectricshock. Never
spill liquid of any kind on the video product.
f. When the video product exhibits a distinct change
inperformance—thisindicatesaneedforservice.
18 Replacement Parts — When replacement parts are
required, have the service technician verify that the
replacements he uses have the same safety
characteristics as the original parts. Use of
replacements specified by the video product
manufacturer can prevent fire, electric shock or other
hazards.
19 Safety Check — Upon completion of any service or
repairs to this video product, ask the service
technician to perform safety checks recommended
by the manufacturer to determine that the video
product is in safe operating condition.
15 Lightning — For added protection for this video
product during a lightning storm, or when it is left
unattended and unused for long periods of time,
unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the
antennaorcable-system.Thiswillpreventdamageto
the video product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
20 Heat — The product should be situated away from
heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Disposal of these materials be regulated due to
environmental considerations. For the disposal
or recycling information, please contact your
local authorities or the Electronics Industries
Alliance : “www.eiae.org.”
5
Cautions When Using
Handle the liquid crystal display (LCD) with care:
• The LCD is a very delicate display device: Do not press its surface with force, hit it or prick it with a
sharp object.
• Ifyou push the LCD surface, unevenness in display may occur.Ifunevenness does not disappear soon,
turn the DVD video camera/ recorder off, wait for a few moments, and then turn it on again.
• Do not place the DVD video camera/ recorder with the open LCD screen down.
• Close the LCD monitor when not using the DVD video camera/ recorder.
Liquid crystal display (LCD) and viewfinder:
• The LCD screen and viewfinder are the products ofhighly precise technology.Among the totalnumber
of pixels (approx. 120,000 pixels for LCD monitor and approx. 110,000 pixels for viewfinder), 0.01% or
less pixels may be missing (black dots) or may remain lit as colored dots (red, blue, green). This shows
the limitations ofthe current technology,and does not indicate a fault that willinterfere with recording.
• The LCD screen and viewfinder will be slightly dimmer than usual when the DVD video camera/
recorder is at low temperature, as in cold areas, or immediately after power is turned on. Normal
brightness will be restored when the temperature inside the DVD video camera/ recorder rises.
Hold the DVD video camera/recorder correctly:
• Do not hold the viewfinder or LCD monitor when lifting the DVD video camera/ recorder: The
viewfinder or LCD monitor could detach and the DVD video camera/ recorder may fall.
Do not subject the DVD video camera/recorder to impact:
• This DVD video camera/ recorder is a precision machine. Take great care that you do not strike it
against a hard object or let it fall.
• Do not use the DVD video camera/ recorder on a tripod in a place where it is subject to severe vibrations
or impact.
No sand or dust!
• Fine sand or dust entering the DVD video camera/ recorder or AC adapter/ charger could cause
malfunctions or defects.
No water or oil!
• Water or oil entering the DVD video camera/ recorder or AC adapter/ charger could cause electric
shock, malfunctions or defects.
6
Heat on surface of product:
• The surface ofthe DVD video camera/ recorder will be slightly warm, but this does not indicate a fault.
Screen on connected TV:
• Never leave the disc navigation screen, still image or camera image displayed on your TV to which the
DVD video camera/ recorder is connected: Doing so could result in displayed image retention or
phosphor degradation of TV screen.
Be careful of ambient temperature:
• Using the DVD video camera/ recorder in a place where the temperature is over 104ºF (40°C) or under
32ºF (0°C) will result in abnormal recording/ playback.
• Take care that the temperature of this DVD video camera/ recorder, when connected to PC does not
rise excessively (reference for usage: approx. 30 minutes at about 86ºF (30ºC)).
• Do not leave the DVD video camera/ recorder on beach sand or in a closed vehicle where the
temperature is very high for a long time: This could cause malfunctions.
Do not point directly at the sun:
• If direct sunlight strikes the lens or viewfinder, the DVD video camera/ recorder could malfunction or
a fire could occur.
• Do not leave the DVD video camera/ recorder with the LCD screen exposed to direct sunlight: This
could cause malfunctions.
Do not use the DVD video camera/recorder near TV or radio:
• This could cause noise to appear on the TV screen or in radio broadcasts.
Do not use the DVD video camera/recorder near strong radio waves or magnetism:
• If the DVD video camera/ recorder is used near strong radio waves or magnetism, such as near a radio
wave tower or electric appliances, noise could enter video and audio that are being recorded. During
playback of normally recorded video and audio, noise may also be present in picture and sound.
At worst the DVD video camera/ recorder could malfunction.
Do not expose the DVD video camera/recorder to soot or steam:
• Thick soot or steam could damage the DVD video camera/ recorder case or cause malfunctions.
Do not use the DVD video camera/recorder near corrosive gas:
• If the DVD video camera/ recorder is used in a place where there is dense exhaust gas generated by
gasoline or diesel engines, or corrosive gas such as hydrogen sulfide, the external or internal terminals
could corrode, disabling normal operation, or the battery connecting terminals could corrode, so that
power will not turn on.
Do not use the DVD video camera/recorder near ultrasonic humidifier:
• With some water in humidifier, calcium and other chemicals dissolved in water could scatter in the air,
and white particles could adhere to the optical head of the DVD video camera/ recorder, which could
cause it to operate abnormally.
Do not expose the DVD video camera/recorder to insecticide:
• Insecticide entering the DVD video camera/ recorder could dirty the lens in laser pickup block, and
in such a case the DVD video camera/ recorder might not operate normally. Turn the DVD video
camera/ recorder off and cover it with vinyl sheet, etc. before using insecticide.
Do not use a generally available 8 cm CD lens cleaner:
• Cleaning the lens is not necessary when using this DVD video camera/ recorder in the usual way.
• Using 8 cm CD lens cleaner could cause this DVD video camera/ recorder to be faulty.
7
Be careful of moisture condensation:
• When you move the DVD video camera/ recorder between places where the difference in
temperatures is great -such as entering a lodge from a ski slope or going out ofa cooled room or vehicle
-condensation (vapor in air warmed or cooled to water droplets)could occur on the lens and/ or inside
the DVD video camera/ recorder.Ifcondensation occurs,do not open the cover ofdiscor card insertion
block ifpossible.Ifcondensation occurs on the lens,wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth. Even if the external
surface of DVD video camera/ recorder has dried, condensation may remain inside: Turn the DVD
video camera/ recorder off and leave it in a dry place for at least 1-2 hours before using it again.
Do not use the DVD video camera/recorder for a long uninterrupted period of time:
• This DVD video camera/ recorder cannot be used for a long time continuously as a surveillance
camera/ monitor. If you use the DVD video camera/ recorder for a long continuous period of time, the
temperature of DVD video camera/ recorder could exceed a limit and the recording/ playback
operation could be slowed down: In this case, turn it off and wait for a while before using it again.
Do not turn the DVD video camera/recorder off while the ACCESS/PC indicator or
CARD ACCESS indicator is lit or blinking:
• The ACCESS/ PC or CARD ACCESS indicator is lit or
blinking to show that data is being written to disc or card, or
being read from it. At this time, do not do any of the
following, so as not to damage the data:
− Remove battery
CARD
ACCESS
indicator
− Disconnect AC adapter/ charger
− Plug or unplug PC connection cable
− Remove disc or card
ACCESS/PC
indicator
− Subject DVD video camera/ recorder to severe vibrations
or impact.
− Violently open or close the LCD monitor
If you turn the DVD video camera/ recorder off while the ACCESS/ PC or CARD ACCESS indicator is
lit or blinking, turn it on again with the discor card loaded in it:Repair ofthe discor card will be executed
automatically (see page 165).
Do not wipe the DVD video camera/recorder case with benzene or thinner:
• The coating of case could peel off or the case surface could deteriorate.
• When using a chemical cleaning cloth, follow the instructions.
Also read the instructions attached with optional accessories:
• For optional accessories, observe the cautions and follow instruction manuals attached.
8
Cautions When Storing
Do not leave the DVD video camera/recorder in a place where the temperature is very
high for a long period of time:
• The temperature inside a closed vehicle or trunk can become very high in a hot season. If you leave the
DVD video camera/ recorder in such a place, it could malfunction or the case could be damaged. Also,
do not expose the DVD video camera/ recorder to direct sunlight or place it near a heater.
Do not store the DVD video camera/recorder in a place where the humidity is high or
in a dusty place:
• Dust entering the DVD video camera/ recorder could cause malfunctions. If the humidity is high, the
lens could be moldy, and the DVD video camera/ recorder could become inoperable. It is
recommended that you put the DVD video camera/ recorder with desiccant in a box when storing it
in a closet, etc.
Do not store the DVD video camera/recorder in a place subject to strong magnetism
or intense vibrations:
• This could cause malfunctions.
Detach the battery from the DVD video camera/recorder and store it in a cool place:
• Leaving the battery attached or storing it at high temperature could shorten its life.
Suggestions and Restrictions
Make a trial recording:
• Always make a trialrecording before doing actualrecording to make sure that recording is normal. The
data that have not been stored normally because ofa defect in the DVD video camera/ recorder cannot
be restored.
It is recommended that you use DVD-RAM disc from which recorded contents can be deleted for trial
recording.
Do not use the DVD video camera/recorder for professional applications:
• This DVD video camera/ recorder is designed and produced for home-use recording and playback.
The recorded contents cannot be compensated for:
• Hitachicannot compensate for any damages caused when recording is not made normally or recorded
contents cannot be played back because of a defect in the DVD video camera/ recorder, disc or card.
Also, Hitachi cannot be responsible for your recorded video and audio.
• Ifyou or a third party make a mistake when handling this DVD video camera/ recorder, disc, card, etc.,
the recorded contents may be lost. We cannot be responsible for compensation for damage due to loss
of recorded contents.
Copyright:
• Data recorded on the disc or card in this DVD video camera/ recorder using other digital/ analog
media or devices are protected by the copyright act and cannot be used without permission of the
owner of copyright, except for personal enjoyment. Be aware that recording is restricted for some
demonstrations, performances and exhibitions, even for personal enjoyment.
9
Read This First
To guide you, we've included following six chapters.
• The section on “Setups” explains how to set up
the DVD video camera/ recorder, battery, and
set the date/ time.
We want this manual to be as helpful as possible,
soitincludestwoeasywaystofindtheinformation
you need:
• The section on “Basic Techniques” explains the
basic operation of this DVD video camera/
recorder - recording of movies, still images,
external input, and playback of recorded
images.
• A quick index for the information you use most
often (this page).
• A detailed table of contents directing you to
specific information quickly (see page 13-15).
• Thesection on “Advanced Techniques” explains
settings on this DVD video camera/ recorder for
more advanced usage.
• The section on “Disc Navigation” explains
editing with Disc Navigation: Refer to this
section when finalizing DVD-R disc and
initializing DVD-RAM disc.
• The section on “Connecting to PC” explains the
contents of provided CD-ROM and how to
install the software included.
• “Subsidiary Information” includes an
introduction to products sold separately, proper
cleaning, and troubleshooting.
Get to know your DVD video camera/recorder by
using this manual, and get to know Hitachi. We
appreciate your business.
Quick Index
Available Discs.................................................25
Recording Movie..............................................49
Playing Back ....................................................58
Connecting to a TV..........................................77
Functions Available with Disc Navigation.......109
Connecting to PC...........................................140
With this DVD video camera/ recorder you can view the picture being recorded or the playback picture
whether on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. Opening or closing the LCD monitor switches the picture
to appear on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.The following text describes the operation assuming that
the viewfinder is used as a major monitor device.
About This Manual
●Displays in this manual
Understand that the displays are different from those you will actually see in the viewfinder or on the
LCD screen.
●Notation of cancel button
Press the stop/ cancel button to stop your operation midway, or return the menu screen to the preceding
one. The expression “press the C button” will be used in this text.
●1, 2 and 3 marks beside headings
Some functions of this DVD video camera/ recorder are unavailable with disc or card used. Refer to the
marks at right above each function to identify whether the disc or card is compatible with the function.
Refer to these marks and identify the functions and operation to match the disc or card you use.
●Illustrations in this manual
Although the external appearances of DZ-MV550A and DZ-MV580A are different, the method of
operating both models is identical.
The illustrations of DZ-MV580A are used for the explanation in this text.
10
Introduction
●You can start recording immediately after stopping playback (P.49, 58)
Unlike tape devices, you do not need to search for the recording start position or locate the beginning
of blank portion.
You can stop playback and immediately start recording: New recording will not overwrite any
previously recorded data.
Recorded scenes
If you stop playback midway and start recording, overwrite will not occur.
●You can immediately play back desired recorded scenes (P.107)
You do not need to rewind, unlike recorders using tape.
You can select any scene you want and immediately play it back (using Disc Navigation function).
●You can easily print without PC (P.120)
Use DPOF to set the photos to be printed and the print number among the photos recorded on SD
memory card or MultiMediaCard: This is useful when printing photos on a printer conforming to SD
memory card or when asking a photo lab to print them.
●Use Disc Navigation to create your original movie (P.126)
You can delete unnecessary scenes, move any scenes, etc., and create your original movie work (Play
List).
Before editing
After editing
11
●Youcaneasilyeditscenes,whichis ●Create original DVDs on PC (P.152)
quite difficult with tape (P.86)
You can use a DVD-R disc to create an original
DVD, using the provided software CD-ROM.
The created DVD disc can be played back on DVD
player, DVD-ROM drive, etc.
Using this DVD video camera/ recorder, you can
collect scenes of your child, for example, on play
list of Disc Navigation function and create an
original movie:Then simply play back the play list
and dub it on VCR. It is also easy to make any
number of identical tapes.
Up to now, you had to
repeatedly press
buttons
With DVD, you can simply
play back this DVD video
camera/recorder, and
press the record button on
VCR.
Original DVD being
created
Playback of DVD
12
Table of Contents
CHARGING BATTERY........................................39
ATTACHING BATTERY TO DVD VIDEO
Important Information ........................................2
For Your Safety .................................................2
Precautions .......................................................2
CAMERA/RECORDER.....................................40
REMOVING BATTERY........................................40
BATTERY REMAINING LEVEL INDICATOR......42
EFFICIENT USE OF BATTERY ..........................42
USING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS ...........................4
Cautions When Using ........................................6
Cautions When Storing ......................................9
Suggestions and Restrictions.............................9
Read This First.................................................10
About This Manual ...........................................10
Introduction ......................................................11
Table of Contents.............................................13
Checking Provided Accessories.......................16
Names of Parts ................................................17
Try to Record and Play Back using Disc
WITH AC ADAPTER/CHARGER......................43
Inserting and Removing Disc .......................... 44
INSERTING DISC................................................44
REMOVING DISC................................................46
Inserting and Removing Card.......................... 47
Basic Techniques
Basic Handling of DVD Video Camera/
Recorder....................................................... 48
TURNING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/
(Video and Photo)..........................................21
Try to Record and Play Back using Card
(Photo)...........................................................23
Discs and Cards...............................................25
RECORDER ON AND OFF ..............................48
Recording Movie ............................................. 49
Recording Stills ............................................... 50
Compensating for Backlight ............................ 51
On-Screen Information.................................... 52
AVAILABLE DISCS .............................................25
INFORMATION ON DVD-R DISC .......................26
EXAMPLES OF DISCS THAT CANNOT BE
USED ON THIS DVD VIDEO
INFORMATION DISPLAY DURING
RECORDING....................................................52
Zooming .......................................................... 56
CAMERA/RECORDER:....................................26
HANDLING DISCS ..............................................27
AVAILABLE CARDS............................................28
MACRO RECORDING ........................................57
RECORDING SUBJECTS FOR STRONGER
WIDE-ANGLE OR TELEPHOTO EFFECT.......57
Storage Capacity on Disc or Card....................29
Playing Back.................................................... 58
RECORDABLE TIME OF MOVIE (VIDEO) .........29
RECORDABLE STILLS (PHOTOS) ON DISC ....29
RECORDABLE STILLS (PHOTOS) ON CARD...30
SIZE AND QUALITY OF PHOTOS......................30
PLAYING BACK ..................................................58
PLAYBACK FROM START OF DISC OR
CARD................................................................59
SEARCH PLAYBACK OF MOVIE .......................59
FRAME ADVANCE/FRAME BACK/SLOW
PLAYBACK OF MOVIE ....................................59
SKIP PLAYBACK OF MOVIE ..............................60
PLAYING BACK STILLS .....................................60
JUMPING TO SPECIFIED POINT (GO TO)........61
Setups
Setting Up the DVD Video Camera/
Recorder........................................................31
HOLDING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/
RECORDER .....................................................31
ATTACHING SHOULDER STRAP......................32
ATTACHING LENS CAP .....................................32
INSERTING BATTERY INTO REMOTE
On-Screen Information Display ....................... 62
INFORMATION DISPLAY DURING
PLAYBACK.......................................................62
Checking Flow of Quick Mode......................... 63
CONTROL ........................................................33
Camera Functions
REMOVING BATTERY FROM REMOTE
CONTROL ........................................................33
VIEWING SUBJECT THROUGH
VIEWFINDER ...................................................34
FLOW OF QUICK MODE WHEN RECORDING
MOVIE: .............................................................64
FLOW OF QUICK MODE WHEN RECORDING
PHOTO (DISC): ................................................65
FLOW OF QUICK MODE WHEN RECORDING
PHOTO (CARD):...............................................66
Disc Navigation Functions
VIEWING IMAGE ON LCD MONITOR
SCREEN...........................................................35
CLOSING LCD MONITOR ..................................36
SETTING DATE AND TIME ................................37
CHANGING DISPLAY FORMAT OF DATE
AND TIME.........................................................38
FLOW OF QUICK MODE
(WITH DVD-RAM DISC):..................................68
FLOW OF QUICK MODE
(WITH DVD-R DISC): .......................................69
Setting Up the Battery......................................39
13
FLOW OF QUICK MODE (WITH CARD): ........... 70
Manually Focusing Subject..............................71
FOCUSING DURING RECORDING ................... 71
Adjusting Brightness of Image to be recorded
(Exposure).....................................................73
SETTING COLOR DENSITY OF LCD
SCREEN (COLOR LEVEL) ............................101
Initial Settings ................................................102
SWITCHING OPERATING SOUND ON OR
OFF (BEEP)....................................................102
TURNING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER
OFF AUTOMATICALLY (POWER SAVE)......102
TURNING RECORD LED ON OR OFF
(RECORD LED)..............................................103
CHANGING DISPLAY LANGUAGE
(LANGUAGE) .................................................103
RESETTING MENU SETTINGS TO
DEFAULTS (RESET)......................................104
Using Full Auto Function..................................74
Setting Video Flash (for DZ-MV580A) .............75
USING EXTERNAL MICROPHONE ................... 76
Viewing on TV Screen .....................................77
CONNECTING TO A TV ..................................... 77
VIEWING ON TV SCREEN................................. 78
Playback on DVD Video Recorder/Player .......79
PLAYING BACK DVD-RAM DISC....................... 79
PLAYING BACK DVD-R DISC ............................ 80
Removing and Replacing from/in Round DVD
Holder............................................................81
Disc Navigation
Using Disc Navigation....................................105
STARTING OR TERMINATING DISC
NAVIGATION..................................................105
PLAYING BACK FROM DISC NAVIGATION
SCREEN.........................................................107
SELECTING MULTIPLE SCENES....................108
SELECTING CONSECUTIVE SCENES
HOW TO REMOVE DISC.................................... 81
REPLACING DISC IN ROUND DVD HOLDER... 82
WHEN THE HINGE OF ROUND DVD HOLDER
COMES OFF .................................................... 82
DISC CLEANING................................................. 82
TOGETHER....................................................108
FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE WITH DISC
NAVIGATION..................................................109
UNDERSTANDING FLOW OF DISC
Recording (Dubbing) Images...........................83
RECORDING (DUBBING) IMAGES FROM
OTHER VIDEO DEVICE................................... 83
RECORDING (DUBBING) IMAGES FROM
OTHER VIDEO CAMERAS .............................. 85
RECORDING (DUBBING) IMAGES ON
NAVIGATION MENU ......................................110
Scene.............................................................111
DELETING SCENES (DELETE)........................111
CHANGING IMAGES FOR THUMBNAILS
(EDIT - THUMBNAIL) .....................................113
PLAYING BACK BY SKIPPING SCENES
(EDIT - SKIP)..................................................114
ARRANGING ORDER OF SCENES
OTHER VIDEO DEVICES ................................ 86
Advanced Techniques
Checking Flow of Normal Display Mode..........87
Camera Functions
(EDIT - MOVE) ...............................................114
DIRECTING SCENES EFFECTIVELY
Setting Up Camera Functions..........................90
SELECTING SHOOTING MODE TO MATCH
THE SUBJECT
(EDIT - FADE) ................................................115
COMBINING MULTIPLE SCENES
(SWITCHING PROGRAM AE MODE).............. 90
ADJUSTING COLOR (WHITE BALANCE).......... 91
USING THE ELECTRONIC IMAGE
STABILIZER (EIS)............................................ 93
REDUCING WIND NOISE DURING
RECORDING (MIC.FILTER) ............................ 93
SETTING TO WIDE TV SCREEN MODE
(16:9 MODE)..................................................... 94
(EDIT - COMBINE) .........................................116
DIVIDING MOVIES (EDIT - DIVIDE).................117
COPYING STILLS ON DVD-RAM DISC TO
CARD (COPY) ................................................118
LOCKING SCENES ON CARD (LOCK)............119
DESIGNATING SCENES TO BE PRINTED
(DPOF) ...........................................................120
SELECTING SCENES USING MENU SCREEN
(SELECT) .......................................................121
DISPLAYING INFORMATION USING MENU
SCREEN (DETAIL).........................................122
Setting Up Record Functions...........................96
SWITCHING MOVIE QUALITY
(VIDEO MODE) ................................................ 96
Program.........................................................123
SWITCHING QUALITY OF STILL IMAGE
(QUALITY)........................................................ 97
RECEIVING IMAGE FROM ANOTHER DEVICE
(INPUT SOURCE) ............................................ 98
SWITCHING EXTERNAL INPUT RECORDING
METHOD (PHOTO INPUT) .............................. 98
SELF-TIMER ....................................................... 99
SETTING ON-SCREEN DISPLAY OUTPUT
ON OR OFF (OSD OUTPUT)......................... 100
WHAT IS “PROGRAM”?....................................123
SWITCHING TO THUMBNAIL DISPLAY OF
SPECIFIC DATE (SWITCH) ...........................123
PLAYING BACK PROGRAM (PLAY) ................124
CHANGING TITLE OF PROGRAM (TITLE)......124
Play List .........................................................126
WHAT IS “PLAY LIST”?.....................................126
CREATING NEW PLAY LIST (CREATE)..........126
SWITCHING TO DISPLAY OF EACH PLAY
LIST (SWITCH)...............................................127
PLAYING BACK A PLAY LIST (PLAY)..............127
LCD Setup .....................................................101
SETTING BRIGHTNESS OF LCD SCREEN
(BRIGHTNESS).............................................. 101
14
ADDING SCENES TO PLAY LIST
(EDITING PLAY LIST)....................................128
DELETING SCENES FROM PLAY LIST
Subsidiary Information
Introduction to Optional Accessories............. 157
CAMERA ACCESSORIES ................................157
POWER SUPPLY ..............................................157
INFORMATION ON SQUARE ADAPTER .........157
Cleaning ........................................................ 158
(EDITING PLAY LIST)....................................129
ADDING SCENES USING SUBMENU FOR
EDITING (EDITING PLAY LIST) ....................129
DELETING SCENES USING SUBMENU FOR
EDITING (EDITING PLAY LIST) ....................130
SELECTING SCENES USING SUBMENU
FOR EDITING (EDITING PLAY LIST)............130
ARRANGING ORDER OF SCENES (MOVE) ...131
CHANGING TITLE OF PLAY LIST (TITLE).......132
DELETING PLAY LIST (DELETE).....................132
Changing Setting of Demonstration .............. 159
Terminology................................................... 160
No DVD Video Camera/Recorder Operation -
Check the Following: .................................. 163
Trouble Messages......................................... 165
Troubleshooting............................................. 172
System Reset................................................ 181
Major Specifications ...................................... 182
To Order in the United States........................ 184
To Order in the Canada................................. 184
Index.............................................................. 185
Be sure to read the following before opening
the package of CD-ROM ............................ 187
Go To .............................................................133
TOP (END) ........................................................133
Disc or Card Management .............................134
VERIFYING REMAINING FREE SPACE ON
DISC OR CARD (CAPACITY) ........................134
PROTECTING DISC FROM WRITING
(PROTECT DISC)...........................................134
INITIALIZING DVD-RAM DISC OR CARD
(FORMAT DISC. FORMAT CARD) ................135
UPDATING CONTROL INFORMATION OF
DVD-RAM DISC
(UPDATE CONTROL INFO.)..........................136
FINALIZING DVD-R DISC (FINALIZE DISC) ....137
Others ............................................................138
DISPLAYING MOVIES OR STILLS
INDEPENDENTLY (CATEGORY)..................138
PLAYING BACK SCENES REPEATEDLY
(REPEAT PLAY).............................................138
SLIDE SHOW (CONTINUOUS PLAYBACK OF
STILLS)...........................................................139
Connecting to PC
THE FOLLOWING ARE AVAILABLE WHEN
CONNECTING TO PC....................................140
Contents on Provided CD-ROM.....................142
Installing Software..........................................144
DISPLAYING INSTALLER SCREEN.................144
INSTALLING USB DRIVER...............................145
INSTALLING UDF DRIVER
(DVD-RAM DRIVER)......................................146
INSTALLING DVD-MovieAlbumSE ...................148
INSTALLING MyDVD ........................................150
Creating DVD Video on PC from DVD-RAM
Disc Recorded on DVD Video Camera/
Recorder......................................................152
Uninstalling Software .....................................154
UNINSTALLING USB DRIVER..........................154
DELETING OTHER APPLICATIONS................155
Cautions When Using DVD Video Camera/
Recorder by Connecting It to PC.................156
15
Checking Provided Accessories
Make sure that you have all the following accessories in package:
Battery (model DZ-BP14S):
AC adapter/charger (model DZ-ACS1):
DC power cord:
Portable power supply for this DVD video
camera/recorder. Charge it before use.
Used to power the DVD video camera/
recorder from AC outlet, or charge battery. recorder from household AC outlet, use this
cord to connect the DVD video camera/
When powering the DVD video camera/
recorder and AC adapter/charger.
Power cable:
Infrared remote control
Lithium battery (model CR2025):
Connect between household AC outlet and (model DZ-RM3W):
To power the remote control.
AC adapter/charger.
Use to control the DVD video camera/
recorder from a distance.
WARNING: Keep
this battery away
from children. If
swallowed, consult
a physician
immediately for
emergency
treatment.
AV/S input/output cable:
Shoulder strap:
Lens cap and lens cap string:
Used when viewing the picture played back Attach to the DVD video camera/recorder to Attach the lens cap when not recording, to
on the DVD video camera/recorder on TV
screen, or input or output video from/to
another video device.
hang it from shoulder.
protect the lens.
Single-sided 8 cm DVD-RAM disc (in
Round DVD Holder):
Software CD-ROM:
PC connection cable:
UsethisCD-ROMwhenconnectingtheDVD Use this cable when connecting the DVD
To record videos (movies) and photos (stills) video camera/recorder to PC.
on this DVD video camera/recorder.
video camera/recorder to PC.
Note:
The provided single-sided DVD-RAM disc is not generally available in shops: When purchasing a disc, order a 60-
minute double-sided disc (2.8GB, in Round DVD Holder).
ex. Maxell DVD-RAM Camcorder Disc 2.8GB Round Holder Type (item #567620)
16
Names of Parts
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
A/V
BATTERY EJECT
11
12
MIC
1
1
2
3
4
(Bottom)
(Inside the cover)
Infrared receiver (P. 34)
8
9
Accessory shoe
Only for DZ-MV580A:
The optional video flash, etc. can be attached
here.(See the instruction manualofdevice to be
attached for details.)
When the remote control is used to operate the
DVD video camera/ recorder, this receiver will
receive the infrared signal.
2
3
Lens cap string attachment hole (P. 32)
External microphone jack (P. 76)
Recording indicator (P. 103)
The red indicator will light during recording.
10 AV input/output jack (P. 77, 83)
11 2.5" type liquid crystal display (inside)
(P. 35)
4
5
Stereo microphone (P. 76)
Optical 18× zoom lens (DZ-MV550A)
Optical 10x zoom lens (DZ-MV580A)
(P. 56)
12 QUICK MODE switch (P. 63)
To switch the menu display on screen between
Advanced mode and Quick mode.
6
7
Lens hood (P. 57)
13 BATTERY EJECT switch (P. 40)
Always remove this lens hood when using
generally available tele-conversion or wide-
conversion lens.
The BATTERY EJECT switch is located on the
bottom of this DVD video camera/ recorder:
Slide it when removing the battery.
Although the external appearances of DZ-
MV550A and DZ-MV580A are different, the
method of operating both models is identical.
DZ-MV580A illustrations are used in this
manual.
Zoom lever (P. 56)
Push the lever to the T side for telephoto, or to
the W side for wide-angle.
17
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23 24 25
26
14 Viewfinder (P. 34)
15 Diopter control (P. 34)
19 CARD ACCESS indicator (P. 8, 50)
20 Card insertion block (P. 47)
To adjust the focus of image appearing in the
viewfinder. (Pull out the viewfinder.)
21 Battery attachment platform (P. 40)
22 Record button (REC) (P. 49)
23 Power switch (P. 48, 49, 50)
16 ACCESS/PC indicator (P. 8, 49, 50)
Will blink or light when the disc in DVD video
camera/ recorder is accessed (write or read is
executed) or the DVD video camera/ recorder
is connected to PC.
24 LOCK switch (P. 50)
It is recommended that you set the LOCK
switch to
(to the left) to prevent the power
17 DISC EJECT button (P. 44)
Press down and release this button to open the
disc guide.
switch in the “O VIDEO” position from
accidentally moving to “N PHOTO”.
25 Speaker (P. 58)
18 Disc insertion block (P. 44)
26 Hand strap (P. 31)
18
27
28
29 30
31
32
33
34
27 FULL AUTO button (P. 74)
35
36
37
38
39
36 RESET button (P. 181)
To switch the DVD video camera/ recorder to
full automatic.
To reset all settings to defaults (status when the
DVD video camera/ recorder was shipped
from the factory)
28 FOCUS button (P. 71)
To switch between manual focus and auto-
focus.
37 PC connection terminal (TO PC)
38 Joystick (P. 37, 58, 87, 89)
29 EXPOSURE button (P. 73)
Press this button to adjust the exposure.
30 BLC (backlight compensation) button
(P. 51)
Press this button when subject is being lighted
from rear.
Move the joystick to select a scene or menu
item, and then press the center (A) to play
back the scene, pause it, or designate an option
of the menu.
31 DISC NAVIGATION button (P. 105)
32 SELECT button (P. 108)
39 Stop/cancel button (P. 10, 58, 105)
33 MENU button (P. 37, 88, 111)
To end playback or cancel setting of menu.
Pressthisbutton to display themenu for setting
camera functions and Disc Navigation.
34 DISPLAY (Screen display) button (P. 62)
Press this button to display the details ofimage
being played back or camera setting status, or
switch the display off.
35 Volume control buttons (VOL)/ S R buttons
(P. 58, 71, 73)
To adjust the volume of sound from speaker,
etc.
19
DIGITAL
ZOOM
REC
ZOOM
40
41
46
47
T
W
42
48
49
50
43
DISC
NAVIGATION
DISPLAY
51
52
44
45
MENU SELECT DELETE
53
54
DZ-RM3W
40 REC button (P. 49, 50)
46 ZOOM T button (P. 56)
41 DIGITAL ZOOM button (P. 56)
42 Reverse skip button (P. 60)
43 Reverse search button (P. 59)
44 DISC NAVIGATION button (P. 105)
45 MENU button (P. 37, 90, 112)
47 ZOOM W button (P. 56)
48 Forward search button (P. 59)
49 Play/pause button (P. 58)
50 Forward skip button (P. 60)
51 DISPLAY button (P. 62)
52 Stop button (P. 10, 58, 107)
53 DELETE button (P. 111)
54 SELECT button (P. 108)
* The buttons on remote control will function the same as those on DVD video camera/ recorder.
20
12
Try to Record and Play Back using Disc
(Video and Photo)
• It is recommended that you use a DVD-RAM disc for trial recording, since
you can delete the recorded contents (P. 25).
Before You Begin
You can record both videos and photos on DVD-RAM disc; only videos on DVD-R disc.
1
Connect a power supply (P. 43).
Power cable
1
2
4
3
AC adapter/charger
DC power cord
2
Insert a disc (P. 44).
1Press down the DISC EJECT button once and
3Insert the disc, in Round DVD Holder, into
the discguide properly untilit stops,and then
close the cover of disc insertion block.
release it.
DISC EJECT button
DISC EJECT
Disc cover
2Gently open the cover until it stops.
PUSH CLOSE
portion
21
3
Start recording (P. 49).
1Open the LCD monitor (P. 35).
3Press the REC button.
Recording will start.
Pressing the REC button again will stop
recording (O VIDEO).
Pressing REC will enable you to record one
photo (N PHOTO).
2While holding the gray switch at the center of
power switch,set the switch to “OVIDEO” or
“N PHOTO”. (“O VIDEO” only for DVD-R
disc)
Note:
• When using an unformatted disc, format (initialize) it on this DVD video camera/recorder.
If unformatted disc is inserted into this DVD video camera/recorder, a message will appear: Format the disc
following the instructions on screen (P. 45, 135). Initializing the DVD-RAM disc will erase all the recorded
contents: Make sure the contents on disc are not valuable before initializing the disc.
• See Check 1 on P. 163 if recording is not possible with “O VIDEO”.
• See Check 2 on P. 163 if recording is not possible with “N PHOTO”.
4
View the playback of recorded content on LCD monitor screen (P. 35).
1After recording is finished, press the A
button.
The recorded scene will be played back.
2Press the C button to stop playback.
22
3
Try to Record and Play Back using Card (Photo)
Only photos can be recorded on card.
1
Connect a power supply (P. 43).
Power cable
1
2
4
3
AC adapter/charger
DC power cord
2
Insert a card (P. 47).
1Open the cover of card insertion block with
3Insert the card all the way until it locks, and
power turned off.
then close the cover of card insertion block.
2Put in a card.
23
3
Start recording (P. 50).
1Open the LCD monitor (P. 35).
3Press the REC button.
Pressing REC once will record one photo.
2While holding the gray switch at the center of
power switch, set the switch to “PPHOTO”.
Note:
See Check 2 on P. 163 if recording is not possible with “N PHOTO”.
4
View the playback of recorded content on LCD monitor screen (P. 35).
1Press the A button in recording pause
status: The recorded scene will be played
back.
2Press the C button to stop playback.
24
Discs and Cards
The following table lists the storage media (discs and cards) that can be used on this DVD video camera/
recorder and the functions which are available with them:
Media
SD memory card/
MultiMediaCard
Function
Recording movie
DVD-RAM disc
DVD-R disc
∴
∴
∴
∴
×
×
Recording still
∴
∴
Deleting recorded image
×
Editing on this DVD video
camera/recorder
∴
×
∴
*2
*1
Playback on DVD player
∴
×
×
Playback on DVD video
recorder
*3
*2
*4
∴
∴
×
∴: Functions available; ×: Not available
*1: Can be played back on DVD players with the
mark.
*2: Must be finalized (see “Terminology”, P. 160) on this DVD video camera/recorder before DVD-R disc can be played
back on DVD player or DVD video recorder (see page 137). May not be playable on some DVD players or DVD video
recorders.
*3: Cannot be played back on a DVD video recorder that does not conform to 8 cm DVD-RAM disc.
*4: There are DVD video recorders that are compatible with SD memory card or MultiMediaCard.
AVAILABLE DISCS
Usable discs and logos
DVD-RAM Ver. 2.1 (8 cm)
Shape
In Round DVD
Holder
DVD-R
[for General Ver. 2.0 (8 cm)]
• The Round DVD Holder cannotbe used on the following
DVD video camera/recorders:
- DZ-MV100A
- DZ-MV230A/200A
- DZ-MV270A
- Other DVD video camera/recorders that use square
type adapters.
• See page 26 for information on DVD-R disc.
This DVD video camera/ recorder uses 8 cm DVD-
RAM discs and 8 cm DVD-R discs for camcorder
use.
Discs removed from Round DVD Holder cannot
be used on this DVD video camera/ recorder: Use
them only in the holder. Do not insert a bare disc
removed from the holder into the DVD video
camera/ recorder: It will not be removable.
Note:
• It is recommended that you use Hitachi Maxell discs,
since their compatibility with this DVD video camera/
recorder has been confirmed. Using a disc other than
those made by Hitachi Maxell may not allow the DVD
videocamera/recordertodeliveroptimumperformance.
25
INFORMATION ON DVD-R DISC
You cannot record a still on DVD-R disc, or delete
any recorded images or data.
●Finalizing DVD-R disc
Before using the 8cm DVD-Rdiscprovided on this
DVD video camera/ recorder on a DVD player or
DVD video recorder that is compatible with 8 cm
DVD-R disc, the disc must be finalized on this
DVD video camera/ recorder. For the finalizing
procedure of8cm DVD-Rdisc, refer to “Finalizing
DVD-R Disc (finalize disc)” (P. 137).
For optimum recording on DVD-R disc, this DVD
video camera/ recorder writes control data to the
disc in order to automatically make adjustments
when it is inserted and ejected accompanying
recording. If the disc has no area to be written for
adjustment, recording may not be possible. To
prevent this, do not insert or eject a DVD-R disc
accompanying recording more than 100 times.
Note:
• When using an unformatted DVD-R disc, it is necessary
to format it on this DVD video camera/recorder (see
page 45).
• Do not insert a DVD-R disc recorded on this DVD video
camera/recorder but not finalized, into a recordable
device, such as a DVD video recorder: The recorded
data may be damaged.
• DVD-R discs edited and finalized on PC or those
finalized on another DVD video recorder may not be
playableonthisDVDvideocamera/recorder,depending
on the editing software used or recorded status of DVD-
R disc.
EXAMPLES OF DISCS THAT CANNOT BE USED ON THIS DVD VIDEO
CAMERA/RECORDER:
• DVD-RAM (2.6 GB) Ver. 1.0
• DVD-ROM • MO
• DVD-R (3.9 GB) Ver. 1.0
• DVD-Video • MD
• DVD-R (4.7 GB) for Authoring Ver. 2.0 • CD-R
• iD
• DVD-RW
• DVD+RW
• DVD+R
• CD-RW
• CD
• LD
• Floppy disk
• Discs other than those with diameter of8cm
• CD-ROM
Note:
Discs recorded on PC or DVD video recorder may not be playable on this DVD video camera/recorder: If so, message
“This disc cannot be used.” will appear. Also, blue thumbnails will appear (Fig. 1* on page 27), or normal playback will
not be possible.
26
HANDLING DISCS
• Be careful when removing the disc since the
metal of removal slot of DVD video camera/
recorder, and disc itself, may be hot.
●Using discs
DVD-RAM and DVD-R discs are very delicate
recording media. Carefully read the following
cautions and observe them:
• When using disc on this DVD video camera/
recorder, be sure to keep it in Round DVD
Holder.
●Storing discs
• When storing disc, insert it in Round DVD
Holder into plastic case.
• Always use a brand new disc when recording
important material.
• Be sure not to touch the disc
exposed portion, and be
careful that no dirt adheres to
it.
• Be careful that no condensation occurs on disc.
• Do not place disc in following places:
− Direct sunlight for a long time
− Where humidity is high or in dusty place
− While there is heat from a heater, etc.
• If there is dust, scratch, dirt
on disc or if it is warped, the
Note:
Do not touch
• See page 82 when cleaning the removed disc.
• Seepage81forhowtohandlediscremovedfromRound
DVD Holder.
• Seepage81forhowtosetthediscremovedfromRound
DVD Holder or another disc correctly in Round DVD
Holder.
following phenomena may occur:
− Block noise in playback
image
− Momentary stop ofplayback
image
− Sound interrupted during
playback, or abnormal
sound
Block noise
− Blue thumbnail
Al
l
Pr og r a
m
s
001/ 006
display* (Fig.1)
− Disc cannot correctly
be recognized
− Disc cannot be
initialized
PLAY
RAM
− Delay between video
and audio
Fig. 1
*
Even if disc is normal, the above phenomena
may occasionally occur. While the ACCESS/ PC
indicator islit,do not subject discto vibrations or
impact, and avoid using DVD video camera/
recorder at extremely high or low temperatures,
or in environment where condensation is likely
to occur.
• When recording images,
Al
l
Pr ogr a
m
s
001 / 002
the DVD video camera/
recorder may avoid the
portions of disc where
recording is not possible,
dueto dust,scratches,etc.
[It willpause mat such a
portion and
PLAY
RAM
(Recording one scene
may produce multiple
thumbnails.)
automatically restart
recording (n).]
This will cause recording to be interrupted for
severalsecondsto severalminutes,and multiple
thumbnails will be created by one recording
session as shown above. In this case, the
recordable time on disc will decrease.
27
AVAILABLE CARDS
●Commoncautionsfordiscandcard
• It is recommended that you create a backup file
for valuable data on hard disk of PC.
• Do not do the following, or the data on card may
be damaged or lost:
− Do not remove the card or turn DVD video
camera/ recorder off during reading or
writing of data
SD memory card
andMultiMediaCard
can be used on this
DVD video camera/
recorder.
− Do not use DVD video camera/ recorder in a
place subject to static electricity or electrical
noise
●Handling card
• Do not use cards other than
the designated ones.
• Be sure to use a brand new
Card when recording vital
images.
• Do not touch the card
terminal or allow it to touch
metal.
Note:
• This DVD video camera/recorder can play back image
data recorded on other digital cameras conforming to
theDCF(DesignruleforCameraFilesystem)standard.
The range of image data playable on this DVD video
camera/recorder is that with pixels from 80 horizontal ×
60 vertical to 4000 horizontal × 3000 vertical.
• DCF is an integrated image file format of digital
cameras: Image files can be used on all digital devices
conforming to DCF.
Terminal
• Do not paste anything other
than exclusive label on label pasting portion.
• Do not subject card to impact, bend or drop it.
• Do not disassemble card or modify it.
• Do not expose card to water.
• Do not use or store card in the following places:
− Where the temperature is high, such as in
vehicle at high temperatures, under burning
sun or near a heater.
• Image data edited on PC and certain types of image
data may not be visible on this DVD video camera/
recorder.
• The image data recorded on another device may not be
playable on this DVD video camera/recorder.
− Where humidity is high, or in dusty place
• When the erasure prevention switch on SD
memory card is locked,no recording,deletion or
editing will be possible on the card.
Erasure prevention
switch
Locked status
28
Storage Capacity on Disc or Card
RECORDABLE TIME OF MOVIE (VIDEO)
The recordable time will vary depending on the video recording quality: See page 96 for the setting of
video recording quality.
Movie recordable time on one disc (on single side) (when recording only movies)
Disc used
Recording quality
Application
DVD-RAM
DVD-R
*1
XTRA
FINE
STD
Approx. 18 min
No recording possible Very high quality
*2
*2
Approx. 30 min
Approx. 30 min
Approx. 60 min
High quality
*3
*3
Approx. 60 min
Standard quality
Audio quality prioritized
*4
LPCM
No recording possible Approx. 30 min
*1:Variable bit recording (recording of more than 18 minutes may be possible because the transfer rate varies
automatically between approx. 3-10 Mbps)
*2:Fixed bit rate: Approx. 6 Mbps
*3:Fixed bit rate: Approx. 3 Mbps
*4:Linear PCM recording (see “Terminology”, P. 160) (If your DVD player does not conform to MPEG audio player 2,
record in LPCM mode)
Note:
• Audio in XTRA, FINE or STD mode is recorded in the MPEG audio layer 2 format, which is the option standard of DVD
video standard.
• No movie can be recorded on SD memory card or MultiMediaCard.
• Although the movie quality mode can be changed midway for recordings on DVD-RAM disc, it cannot be changed
on DVD-R disc once the mode has been decided.
• If you record in XTRA mode at high temperatures, the DVD video camera/recorder will get hot and the maximum
transfer rate will be limited to approx. 6 Mbps.
• If a disc recorded is used at high temperatures, normal playback may be impossible: Turn the DVD video camera/
recorder off once, wait until the ambient temperature becomes lower, and then operate it again.
RECORDABLE STILLS (PHOTOS) ON DISC
●Number of recordable stills on one side of disc: Up to 999
If the disc still has free space after recording 999 stills on it, movies can also be recorded on it.
29
RECORDABLESTILLS(PHOTOS)ON SIZE AND QUALITY OF PHOTOS
CARD
The pixel size of stills (JPEG) that can be recorded
on this DVD video camera/ recorder is as follows:
The number of recordable stills will vary
depending on the recording quality: See page 97
for the setting of recording quality.
Setting
Model
Camera input External input
For DZ-MV550A
DZ-MV550A 640 × 480 pixels 640 × 480 pixels
DZ-MV580A 1,280 × 960 pixels 640 × 480 pixels
Recording quality
Capacity
FINE
NORM
Approx. 95
Approx. 200
Approx. 440
Approx. 880
ECO
8 MB
Approx. 45
Approx. 100
Approx. 220
Approx. 440
Approx. 190
Approx. 400
Approx. 880
Approx. 1,760
The following table shows the file size and quality
of one still (JPEG) recorded on card:
16 MB
32 MB
64 MB
File size
Quality
Application
DZ-MV550A DZ-MV580A
128MB Approx. 880
Approx. 1,760 Approx. 3,520
FINE
Approx.
128 KB
Approx. When image
512 KB quality is
prioritized
256 MB Approx. 1,760 Approx. 3,520 Approx. 7,040
512 MB Approx. 3,520 Approx. 7,040 Approx. 14,080
NORM
ECO
Approx.
64 KB
Approx. Standard quality
384 KB
For DZ-MV580A
Approx.
32 KB
Approx. When number of
256 KB stills is prioritized
(quality will be
Recording quality
Capacity
FINE
NORM
Approx. 14
Approx. 35
Approx. 80
Approx. 160
Approx. 320
Approx. 640
ECO
slightly inferior)
8 MB
Approx. 8
Approx. 20
Approx. 50
Approx. 110
Approx. 220
Approx. 440
Approx. 880
Although still images are recorded on DVD-RAM
disc only in the FINE mode, the quality mode can
be chosen when recording stills on card. (P. 97)
The file size of a photo recorded on DVD-RAM
disc in “N PHOTO” status is equal to or larger
than that recorded on card using the FINE quality
in “P PHOTO”.
* JPEG: Joint Photographic Experts Group.
JPEG is one of the photo image compression
standards. It is widely used in digital still cameras
since JPEG files can be used on ordinary PC. When
this DVD video camera/ recorder records on
DVD-RAM disc in “N PHOTO” status, a JPEG
photo will be recorded, along with a photo that
conforms to the DVD video recording (DVD-VR)
format which is used to be output to TV
16 MB
32 MB
64 MB
Approx. 22
Approx. 50
Approx. 100
128MB Approx. 200
256 MB Approx. 400
512 MB Approx. 800
Approx. 1,280 Approx. 1,760
(The numbers of recordable stills above are only for
reference)
Note:
• Cards used on other devices can be used on this DVD
video camera/recorder.
• No movie or music data recorded on card can be
checked, viewed or heard on this DVD video camera/
recorder.Inaddition,nosuchadatafilecanbedisplayed
on this DVD video camera/recorder.
(see “Terminology”, P. 160). Only JPEG photos
will be recorded on SD memory card.
• Use the remaining display function to check the
remaining free space on disc before use. See “Verifying
Remaining Free Space on Disc or Card (Capacity)” on
page 134.
• Some still data recorded on this DVD video camera/
recorder may not be playable on another device.
Note:
• No still can be recorded on DVD-R disc.
• Since the file size is restricted in all quality modes when
recording photos on card (P PHOTO), the quality of
photos on card may be inferior to those recorded on
DVD-RAM disc (N PHOTO).
30
Setups
This section explains preparations for recording - setting up the DVD video camera/recorder and
battery.
Setting Up the DVD Video Camera/Recorder
HOLDING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER
Insert your right hand from the bottom of DVD video camera/ recorder up to the base of your thumb.
Put your hand in a position where you can easily operate the REC button and the Zoom lever.
Adjust the length ofhand strap so that the DVD video camera/ recorder is stable when you press the REC
button with your thumb.
Note:
Caution:
Do not adjust the hand strap while holding the DVD video
Do not lift the DVD video camera/recorder by
camera/recorder: Doing this could cause the DVD video
camera/recorder to fall and be damaged.
holding the viewfinder or LCD monitor: If the
viewfinderorLCDmonitorcomesoff, theDVDvideo
camera/recorder will fall.
31
ATTACHING SHOULDER STRAP
Be sure to pass through the 2 slots.
Pass the shoulder strap through
the shoulder strap attachments.
ATTACHING LENS CAP
1
2
Attach the shorter end of lens cap string to the
lens cap.
Shorter end
Attach the longer end of lens cap string to the
attachment hole of DVD video camera/
recorder.
Longer end
3
Push the both sides of cap inward and attach it
over the lens.
Push and fit
Note:
• Always keep the lens cap on when not using the DVD
video camera/recorder, to protect the lens.
• Whenrecording,attachthelenscaptothehandstrapby
hookingthetabinsidethecapontostrapforcomfortable
shooting.
32
INSERTING BATTERY INTO REMOTE CONTROL
Insert the provided lithium battery into remote control.
1
2
Slide the cover to remove it.
3
Slide the cover to close it.
Insert the lithium battery with the positive R
terminal facing up.
Note:
The life of lithium battery is approximately one year. If the
batteryisdischarged,nooperationispossiblewithremote
control: Replace the battery.
Battery stopper
REMOVING BATTERY FROM REMOTE CONTROL
1
While pushing the battery stopper, slide the
battery out.
While pushing
battery stopper
Battery stopper
Warning:
Note:
• KEEP THE BATTERY AWAY FROM CHILDREN AND
PETS.
• Replace the battery with a Hitachi Maxell, Sony,
Panasonic, Sanyo, Toshiba CR2025, or Duracell
DL2025.Useofanotherbatterymaypresentariskoffire
or explosion.
• IF SWALLOWED CONSULT A PHYSICIAN
IMMEDIATELY FOR EMERGENCY TREATMENT.
• BATTERY MAY EXPLODE IF NOT HANDLED
PROPERLY. DO NOT RECHARGE, DISASSEMBLE
OR DISPOSE OF IN FIRE.
• Dispose of battery safely in accordance with local laws.
Do not dispose of in fire.
• Do not short circuit the battery.
• Do not hold the battery with the metallic tweezers.
• Keep the battery in a dark, cool, dry place.
33
●Using Remote Control
Point the remote control to the infrared receiver on the DVD video camera/ recorder. The remote
controllable distance is up to 16 feet (5 m).
10˚
10˚
15˚
15˚
Infrared receiver
Note:
• The DVD video camera/recorder uses the “VCR2”
remotecontrolcodeofHitachiVCRs.IfyouuseaHitachi
VCR,etc.withremotecontrolcodesetto“VCR2”,aVCR
placed nearthe DVD video camera/recorderwill also be
operated by the remote control: To prevent this, change
the remote control code of the VCR.
• When using the remote control, make sure that the
infrared receiver on DVD video camera/recorder is not
exposed to direct sunlight or any intense light. If the
infrared receiver is subject to light stronger than the
infrared light from remote control, the DVD video
camera/recorder cannot be operated by remote control.
• If there is an obstacle between the remote control and
infrared receiver on DVD video camera/recorder,
remote control may not be possible.
VIEWING SUBJECT THROUGH VIEWFINDER
1
2
Pull out the viewfinder.
Diopter control
Viewfinder
Turn the diopter control knob to adjust the
focus to suit your eyesight.
Note:
• If no image appears in viewfinder, refer to “Check 6” on
page 164.
• If the LCD monitor is open approximately 90°, the
viewfinder will be off.
• Focusing will not be correct unless the viewfinder is
pulled out.
Pull out the finder until a
click is heard.
34
VIEWING IMAGE ON LCD MONITOR SCREEN
If you open the LCD monitor, you can monitor subject image on the LCD screen.
1
Open the LCD monitor.
The LCD monitor has a portion where you can
hook your finger. Hook the finger there to open
the monitor.
●Range where the LCD monitor can
90°
be moved
The LCD monitor can be opened up to
approximately 90º.
Hook your finger
If the LCD monitor is open 90°, it can be tilted with
the screen down as much as 90°, and can also be
tilted with screen up and turned up to 180° so the
screen faces in the same direction as the lens.
(Bottom)
If the LCD monitor is turned 180° so the screen
faces in the same direction as the lens during
recording, subject image will also appear in the
viewfinder as a mirror image (left/ right reversed).
Tilt the LCD monitor to adjust its vertical angle so
that you can see the screen easily.
90˚
180˚
Note:
• If no image appears on LCD monitor screen, refer to
“Check 7” on page 164.
• Be sure to open the LCD monitor approximately 90º
before changing its vertical angle.
• Do not record for a prolonged time with the LCD monitor
turnedapproximately180ºinclosecontactwiththeDVD
videocamera/recorderbody:Doingthiscouldcausethe
DVD video camera/recorder and LCD monitor to
become hot.
35
CLOSING LCD MONITOR
Before closing the LCD monitor, be sure to reset it
at right angles to the DVD video camera/ recorder.
Note:
• Be sure to return the LCD monitor at right angles to the
DVD video camera/recorder before closing it or
replacing it on the DVD video camera/recorder with its
screen facing outside. If the LCD monitor is tilted, it
cannot be closed to the DVD video camera/recorder.
• If the LCD monitor is not securely locked to the DVD
video camera/recorder, no image will appear in the
viewfinder.
Replace the LCD monitor on the DVD video
camera/ recorder with the LCD screen facing
inward until a click is heard.
36
SETTING DATE AND TIME
Set the current date and time so that the date and time you make a recording can be recorded correctly.
The following procedure can also be used to correct the date and time you have already set.
Tilt up/down and to left/
right to select, and then
press A to designate.
1
2
Turn the DVD video camera/ recorder on.
Press the MENU button.
5
Tilt the joystick to left or
right to select the digit
you want to set in
sequence.
Da t e Se u p
t
Da t e Mode
Da t e Se
Ca
m
e r a F u nc
P r og r a
h i t e Ba l .
t
i
on s Se t u p
t
9
/ 3
0
8
/
:
2004
00AM
m
AE
:
:
:
:
:
:
A u t o
A u t o
On
W
The menu screen will
appear.
E
I
S
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
D i g .
IC . F
1 6 : 9
Z
o om
t e r
4 0 x
Tilt the joystick up or
down to select the
number for current date/ time, and then repeat
step 5 to set the current date and time.
M
i
l
O
O
f
f
f
f
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
3
4
Use thejoystick to choose
“Date Setup” and then
“Date Set”.
Note:
Da t e Se
t
u p
To stop date/time setting midway, press the C button.
Da t e Mode
Da t e Se
t
1
/
1
/
2004
6
7
After setting the current
date and time, press the
A button.
12: 00AM
Da t e Se
t
ENTER
RETURN
u p
RAM
9 / 30 / 2004 8 : 00A
M
Da t e se t up?
YES
NO
Tilt the joystick to right.
The screen for verifying
the set date will appear.
Da t e Se
t
ENTER
RAM
The figure for the month
will be selected.
[The digit that is
highlighted first
depends on the date
Da t e Mode
Da t e Se
t
1
/
1
/
2004
If the displayed date and time are correct, use
the joystick to choose “YES”, and then press the
A button.
12: 00AM
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
display format (set up in Date Mode): The digit
on the left end of the date display will be first
highlighted.]
The date and time will be set, and the DVD
video camera/ recorder willenter the recording
pause status.
Note:
Choosing “NO” will restore the menu screen.
After setting the figure for the month, tilt the joystick to
right to select the digit to be set. If you press the A
button after selecting the figure for the month, the
screen for verifying the set date will appear instead of
screen for setting day, year or time.
Note:
This DVD video camera/recorder incorporates a
rechargeablebatterytostorethedateandtimeinmemory.
If this built-in battery is exhausted, the date and time will
be reset. To prevent this, connect the AC adapter/charger
to DVD video camera/recorder every 3 months, and leave
them for at least 24 hours with the DVD video camera/
recorder turned off: The built-in battery will be charged.
37
CHANGING DISPLAY FORMAT OF DATE AND TIME
You can select one of three date display formats: month/ day/ year, day/ month/ year or year/ month/
day. Associated with the selected date display, the time display format will also change as follows:
Date display format
Example of display
5:00PM
9/30/2004
M/D/Y
17:00
D/M/Y
Y/M/D
30/9/2004
PM5:00
2004/9/30
1
2
Press the MENU button.
3
4
Use the joystick to select
Da t e Se u p
t
the desired date display
format, and then press
the A button.
The menu screen will appear.
Da t e Mode
Da t e Se
D/M/
Y
t
Usethejoystick to choose
Da t e Se u p
t
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
“Date Mode” on the
“Date Setup” menu
screen, and then press
the A buttom.
The menu screen for
setting date will be
restored, and the “Date Mode” has been
changed as you designated.
Da t e Mode
Da t e Se
M/D/
D/M/
Y / M/ D
Y
Y
t
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
The options will appear
on the right of “Date Mode”: The Z mark will be
Press the MENU button to switch off the menu
screen.
attached to the currently selected option.
Note:
If the date display format has been changed, the display
format during playback as well as during recording will
also be changed (see page 52).
38
Setting Up the Battery
TheDZ-BP14SbatteryprovidedwiththisDVDvideocamera/recorderhasnotbeenchargedatpurchase
time: Charge it before using the DVD video camera/recorder.
Note:
• Be sure to use the DZ-BP14S, DZ-BP14SW (optional) battery for the DVD video camera/recorder: Using other
batteries could cause the DVD video camera/recorder to malfunction, or result in fire.
• Be sure to use the DZ-ACS1 AC adapter/charger to charge the battery: Using other chargers could cause electric
shock or fire.
• Charge the battery at temperatures of 50 - 86°F (10-30°C).
• If the CHARGE indicator does not light when the AC adapter/charger is plugged into AC outlet, unplug it from the AC
outlet, wait a few moments, and then plug it into the AC outlet again. If the CHARGE indicator still does not light, the
AC adapter/charger may be faulty. Unplug it from the AC outlet and consult your dealer.
• The AC adapter/charger can be used around the world. An AC plug adapter is required in some foreign countries. If
you need one, purchase it from your local electronics distributor.
AC 200-240V
AC Plug Adapter (not supplied)
CHARGING BATTERY
Use the provided AC adapter/ charger to charge
the battery.
3
Attach the battery to AC adapter/ charger.
Note:
1
2
Connect the power cable to AC adapter/
charger.
When charging a battery, unplug the DC power cord from
the DC output jack on AC adapter/charger.
Plug the power cable into AC outlet.
The CHARGE indicator on AC adapter/
charger will light.
Battery
POWER
indicator
POWER and
CHARGE indicators
Power cable
CHARGE indicator
AC adapter/charger
DC output terminal
39
●Battery charged status
You can find out the charged status of battery by checking the CHARGE indicator on AC adapter/ charger:
Charge status
During charge
CHARGE indicator
Lit
Charge complete
Goes out
Note:
See “Troubleshooting” on page 172 when the CHARGE indicator blinks.
●Reference for time required to charge battery (at approx. 25°C):
Approx. 165 minutes
The charge time will vary depending on the remaining power level of battery.
ATTACHING BATTERY TO DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER
1
Fit the battery to the battery attachment
platform on this DVD video camera/ recorder
and slide it upward until a click is heard.
Note:
• Make sure that the battery is in the correct orientation.
• Make sure that the battery is securely attached:
Incomplete attachment could cause the battery to fall,
resulting in damage.
Terminal
must
face up.
REMOVING BATTERY
After using the DVD video camera/ recorder, remove the battery from it.
1
2
SlidetheBATTERYEJECTswitch on the bottom
of DVD video camera/ recorder, and hold it.
Note:
• For safety, be sure to turn the DVD video camera/
recorder off before attaching or removing the battery.
• Be careful not to drop the removed battery.
• If the battery remains attached, minute level current will
flow even if the DVD video camera/recorder is off, and
the battery will discharge.
Slide the battery downward to remove it.
40
The reference for how long the DVD video
camera/recordercanactuallybeusedwill
be approx. 1/2 to 1/3 of the above time:
●Continuously recordable time with
fully charged battery (with no zoom
operation, etc.)
The continuously recordable time of DVD video
camera/ recorder in the left table shows the time
available when the DVD video camera/ recorder is
in the recording mode without using any other
function after recording is started. In actual
recording, the battery will discharge 2-3 times
faster than this reference,since theREC button and
zoom are being operated, and playback is
performed. Assume that the actually recordable
time with a fully charged battery is between 1/ 2
and 1/ 3 of the above time, and prepare enough
batteries to allow for the time you are planning to
record on the DVD video camera/ recorder.
The continuously recordable time may be less
depending on the conditions when the DVD video
camera/ recorder is used (if recording and
recording pause are repeated at short intervals,
etc.).
See the following table as a reference for how long
theDVD video camera/ recorder can continuously
be used with a fully charged battery:
For DZ-MV550A
Video
quality
mode
DVD-RAM disc DVD-R disc
XTRA*1
When using
viewfinder
approx. 140 min
approx. 120 min
−
−
When using
LCD monitor
FINE
When using
viewfinder
approx. 140 min approx. 135 min
approx. 120 min approx. 115 min
approx. 165 min approx. 160 min
approx. 135 min approx. 130 min
When using
LCD monitor
STD
When using
viewfinder
When using
LCD monitor
Note that the battery discharges faster in cold
places.
LPCM*2
When using
viewfinder
approx. 135 min
approx. 115 min
−
−
●The time taken for charging the
battery is 165 minutes at 77ºF
(25ºC).
When using
LCD monitor
For DZ-MV580A
Note:
Video
quality
mode
XTRA*1
• See page 172 when charging is not possible.
• The charge time will vary depending on the battery
remaining level.
DVD-RAM disc DVD-R disc
When using
viewfinder
approx. 130 min
approx. 110 min
−
−
• During and after charging, the battery will be warm, but
this does not indicate a fault.
When using
LCD monitor
• A battery cannot be charged while the DC power cord is
connected to the DC output jack of AC adapter/charger:
Unplug the DC power cord when charging a battery.
• Chargethebatteryatambienttemperature50°Fto86°F
(10°Cto30°C):Chargingattemperaturesotherthanthis
range could damage the battery.
FINE
When using
viewfinder
approx. 130 min approx. 125 min
approx. 110 min approx. 105 min
approx. 150 min approx. 145 min
approx. 125 min approx. 120 min
When using
LCD monitor
STD
When using
viewfinder
When using
LCD monitor
LPCM*2
When using
viewfinder
approx. 125 min
approx. 105 min
−
−
When using
LCD monitor
*1 The XTRA mode can be set only when a DVD-RAM
disc is used. The time is only for reference: It will vary
depending on recording contents.
*2 LPCM mode can be set only when DVD-R disc is used.
41
BATTERY REMAINING LEVEL INDICATOR
When the battery is used to power the DVD video camera/ recorder, the battery remaining level appears
in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen as follows:
Fully charged
Nearly empty
(Blinks)
White portion shows remaining level
Note:
The remaining level indicator “w” may be displayed for an extended period, and “x” or “y” may be displayed
for a shorter period.
EFFICIENT USE OF BATTERY
Charge battery immediately before using DVD
video camera/recorder:
The battery will slightly discharge even if it is
Store in cool, dark place:
When you are not using the DVD video camera/
recorder, remove the battery and store it in a cool,
dark place. If you store it in a place where the
temperature is high, the battery life will be
shortened. Be especially sure not to store the
battery in an environment (in a closed vehicle)
over 140°F (60°C): Neglecting this could damage
the battery. Also, do not store the battery in a place
which is too cold, such as in a refrigerator: Doing
so could cause condensation when using the DVD
video camera/ recorder with the battery.
detached from the DVD video camera/ recorder.If
the battery is left attached to DVD video camera/
recorder, it will consume a slight amount ofpower.
Therefore, it is recommended that you charge the
battery shortly before using the DVD video
camera/ recorder, usually on the day before you
plan to use it.
However, since the battery used for this DVD
video camera/ recorder is free from the memory
effect,you do not need to completely discharge the
battery before charging it.
Battery life:
The battery life varies greatly depending on the
ambient environment and how often the DVD
video camera/ recorder is used. If the usable time
of DVD video camera/ recorder with a fully
charged battery is noticeably short, the battery is
probably dead: Purchase a new one.
When not using the DVD video camera/
recorder for an extended period:
It is recommended that you fully charge the
battery once a year, attach it to DVD video
camera/ recorder and use it up; then remove the
battery and store it in a cool place again.
Power save and discharge of battery:
It is recommended that you turn the DVD video
camera/ recorder off in status other than
recording, since even during recording pause
battery power is consumed at the same level as
during recording.
If, when you specify Power Save On, the recording
pause status continues for approximately 5
minutes, the DVD video camera/ recorder will
automatically turn off.
To set or release power save, see “Turning DVD
Video Camera/ Recorder Off Automatically
(Power Save)” on page 102.
42
USING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER WITH AC ADAPTER/CHARGER
It is recommended that you use the AC adapter/ charger to power the DVD video camera/ recorder from
household AC outlet when you perform settings on it, play back or edit images, or use it indoors.
Note:
Be sure to use the specified AC adapter/charger (DZ-ACS1) to power the DVD video camera/recorder. Using other AC
adapter/chargers could cause electric shock or result in fire.
Power cable
AC adapter/charger
DC power cord
1
Connect the power cable to AC adapter/
charger.
2
3
Plug the power cable into AC outlet.
Plug one end of DC power cord into the DC
output jack on AC adapter/ charger.
4
Attach the other end of DC power cord to the
battery attachment platform on DVD video
camera/ recorder.
43
Inserting and Removing Disc
INSERTING DISC
1
Press down the DISC EJECT button once and
release it.
Correct
orientation
Incorrect
orientation
A few moments after the ACCESS/ PC
indicator blinks, the cover of disc insertion
block will open slightly.
2
3
Gently open the cover by hand until it stops.
Insert the disc, in Round DVD Holder, into the
disc guide until it stops.
Incorrect orientation
Note that the recording/ playback surface of
discmust face the inside ofDVD video camera/
recorder. The orientation for inserting the disc
into the disc guide is also predetermined: Load
the disc correctly, referring to the figure below.
4
5
Push the section marked “PUSH CLOSE” on
the cover of disc insertion block, to close the
cover.
DISC EJECT
button
Turn the DVD video camera/ recorder on
(O VIDEO or N PHOTO).
When “DISC ACCESS” disappears, the DVD
video camera/ recorder is ready for recording.
Disc cover
●Identifying recording/playback
sides of disc:
Single sided disc:
“SIDE A” mark
The recording/ playback side
is opposite to the printed
label.
PUSH CLOSE
portion
Double-sided disc:
• The disc exposed portion must face in the same
direction as the lens, as shown in figure.
• The recording/playback side must face the inside
(DVD video camera/recorder).
The recording/ playback side
of “SIDE A” is opposite to the
“SIDE A” marked side.
The recording/ playback side
of “SIDE B” is the “SIDE A”
marked side.
The opposite side is
the “SIDE A”
recording/playback
side.
Disc
guide
44
Note:
●When using brand-new DVD-R disc
• Disc cannot be inserted or removed unless a charged
battery or AC adapter/charger is connected to the DVD
video camera/recorder.
Recognition of the disc will
start.
The messages on the right
will appear in sequence by
pressing the A button
between messages.
F o rma t D i s c
D i s c i s n o t f o r m a t t e d .
I f i t f o r m a t s , i t b e c o m e s
p o s s i b l e t o u s e f o r c a m e r a .
• If a discharged battery is used, the disc cannot be
inserted or removed: Connect a charged battery or AC
adapter/charger to the DVD video camera/recorder.
• See page 82 for how to set disc in Round DVD Holder.
• If there is some delay before recording starts, refer to
“Check 4” on page 163.
• Thediscinsertionorientationispredetermined:Forcibly
inserting a disc in wrong orientation could damage the
DVD video camera/recorder or Round DVD Holder of
disc.
• If the disc is not correctly inserted, the cover will not
close. Never try to forcibly close the cover: This could
cause damage. Reinsert the disc properly.
• If a single-sided disc is inserted into DVD video camera/
recorder with the printed label facing the inside, an error
message will appear. Remove the disc and reinsert it
with its recording/playback side facing the inside. See
“Trouble Messages” on page 165.
NEXT
CANCEL
When recording on
this DVD video
camera/recorder:
F o rma t D i s c
When final message
Howeve r , when you r e c o r d
f r om PC connec t i on
t e r m i n a l ,
“Format the disc now?”
appears, choose “YES” and
then press the A button.
The disc will be
p l e a s e d o n o t f ormat.
NEXT
CANCEL
automatically formatted.
When formatting is
complete, “DVD-R disc,
Video mode cannot be
changed” will appear (see
page 169): Press the A
button to erase the message.
Once formatted, a DVD-R
disc can no longer be
F o rma t D i s c
• When using double-sided disc
Recording is possible on both sides of double-sided
disc. However, when recording or playback on one side
is finished, recording or playback will not move
automatically to the other side. Remove the disc once
from the DVD video camera/recorder, turn over the disc
in Round DVD Holder and insert it again for continued
use.
F o r m a t t h e d i s c n o w ?
YES NO
ENTER
changed to a disc for PC, even if it has not been
recorded on this DVD video camera/ recorder.
Note:
See page 96 for movie quality mode.
When recording data from PC:
While the above messages are being displayed,
press the C button, or when message “Format the
disc now?” appears, choose “NO” and then press
the A button.
However, if data from PC has not yet been
recorded, the disc can be made usable on this DVD
video camera/ recorder. When inserting the disc
into this DVD video camera/ recorder, the same
message will appear: If you wish to use it on this
DVD video camera/ recorder, choose “YES”.
Note:
Do not initialize a disc on which you wish to record data
created using the application (MyDVD) of PC.
45
REMOVING DISC
1
Set the power switch to
“POWER OFF” to turn the
DVD video camera/
recorder off.
Note:
• Even after the DVD video camera/recorder is turned on,
the disc can be removed unless it is in recording status.
Hold down the DISC EJECT button for approximately 2
seconds, and then release it to remove the disc. (The
DISCEJECTindicatoron theLCDscreenwillblink.)Itis
recommended that you turn the DVD video camera/
recorder off before inserting or removing disc to prevent
misoperation.
• Donotremovethebattery ordisconnecttheACadapter/
charger during removal of the disc or until power is
completely turned off: If you do, the disc cover will not
open. If this happens, reattach the battery or AC
adapter/charger, push down the DISC EJECT button
once, and then release it.
• Do not insert anything other than the 8 cm DVD-RAM or
DVD-R disc into the disc insertion block: Doing so could
cause malfunctions.
2
Press down the DISC EJECT
button once and release it.
In a moment, the cover of
disc insertion block will
open slightly.
• Set the power switch to “POWER OFF” to turn the DVD
video camera/recorder off.
• When inserting or removing the disc, be careful not to
touch the inside of DVD video camera/recorder
(especially, the lens of laser pickup (see “Terminology”,
P.160)).Also,BESURENOTtolookintothelensinlaser
pickup: Doing so could damage your eyesight.
DISC EJECT
3
4
Gently open the cover until
it stops.
When the cover is fully
open, the disc will slightly
come out from the disc
guide, and stop.
Remove the disc.
Hold the top of Round
DVD Holder as shown in
the illustration and
gently pull it out.
Note:
Be careful not to touch the
disc exposed portion when
removing the disc.
When grasping the
holder, avoid the disc
exposed portion.
5
Gently push the section
indicated “PUSH CLOSE”
on the cover of disc
insertion block, to close the
cover.
46
Inserting and Removing Card
1
2
Turn the DVD video camera/ recorder off.
Removing Card:
Push the center of card
edge.
The card will come out
so that it can be held by
fingers.
Open the cover of card
insertion block.
3
Inserting Card:
Insert card with its
terminal inward until it
locks.
4
Close the cover of card
insertion block.
47
Basic Techniques
This section explains about recording of movies and still images, and also basic settings on DVD video
camera/recorder.
Basic Handling of DVD Video Camera/Recorder
TURNING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER ON AND OFF
While holding down the gray button at the center
of power switch, set the switch according to each
recording function:
Note:
• Once you turn the DVD video camera/recorder on to let
itrecognize thedisc, youcan immediately record orplay
back by turning the DVD video camera/recorder on
again (DVD-RAM). However, if you remove the disc,
replaceit,orifthedatechangesafterpoweristurnedon,
itwilltakesometimefortheDVDvideocamera/recorder
to start because it must recognize the disc again (see
page 163).
Set to “N PHOTO”:
To record still on DVD-
RAM disc
Set to “O VIDEO”:
To record movie on DVD-
RAM or DVD-R disc
• Once you have recorded on DVD-R disc and the disc is
leftinDVD videocamera/recorder, youcan immediately
start recording when turning the DVD video camera/
recorder on next time (DVD-R disc).
Set to “OFF”:
The DVD video camera/
recorder will turn off.
• ItwilltakesometimefortheDVDvideocamera/recorder
to display the Disc navigation screen after power is
turned on.
• If you turn the DVD video camera/recorder on, the
ACCESSindicatorwilllightorblinktoshowthattheDVD
video camera/recorder is recognizing the disc or card:
Duringthistime,nooperation,suchasrecording,canbe
performed.
After several seconds, the ACCESS indicator will go
out, and operating the DVD video camera/recorder will
be possible.
Set to “P PHOTO”:
To record still on SD
memory card or
MultiMediaCard
Power ON status
Ifthe ACCESSindicatordoes notgo out, refer to “Check
4” on page 163.
During playback, set the power switch to “O
VIDEO” or “N PHOTO” when using disc, or set it
to “P PHOTO” when using card.
Turn the switch while holding down the gray
button at the center of switch.
CARD ACCESS
indicator
ACCESS/PC
indicator
• When the DVD video camera/recorder is turned on, the
self-diagnosis function will work and a message may
appear. In this case, refer to “Trouble Messages” on
page 165 and take corrective action.
• WhiletheACCESS/PCorCARDACCESSindicatorislit
or blinking, do not violently open or close the LCD
monitor.
Power switch
48
12
Recording Movie
• Insert a recordable DVD-RAM or DVD-R disc into this DVD video camera/
recorder.
Before You Begin
• Sound is recorded from the stereo microphone on the
front of DVD video camera/recorder: Take care that this
microphone is not blocked.
ACCESS/PC
indicator
Pressing REC
once will start
recording;
pressing it
once again will
temporarily
• You can press the REC button immediately after the
DVDvideocamera/recorderenterstherecordingpause
status, but no further recording can be made while
“DISC ACCESS” is being displayed.
Recording will restart after the message disappears.
• Donotturnpoweroffwhilemessage“DISCACCESS”is
being displayed.
stop recording.
• Take care that power is not interrupted while the
ACCESS/PC indicator is blinking.
Power switch
• Theminimumrecordabletimeofmovieisapproximately
3 seconds.
• See page 103 for setting of Record LED (recording
indicator) On/Off.
• For various functions available during recording, see
“Setting Up Camera Functions” on page 90.
• Hitachi cannot be responsible for video and audio that
cannot be recorded or edited because of any defect.
• The power switch can be changed over even during
recording, but the operation will not be changed.
• Each time the DVD video camera/recorder enters the
recording pause status, the counter display will be reset
to “0:00:00”.
• WhenusingDVD-Rdisc,donotperformthefollowing,or
data on the disc may not be read:
- Using another device, doing additional recording on
DVD-R disc recorded on this DVD video camera/
recorder
- Using this DVD video camera/recorder, doing
additional recording on DVD-R disc recorded on
another device
1
Turn the DVD camera/ recorder on.
Set the power switch to “O VIDEO” to turn the
DVD video camera/ recorder on.
After the ACCESS/ PC indicator goes out,
perform the subsequent operation:
2
3
Check the subject on the screen (viewfinder or
LCD).
If using the viewfinder, pull it out.
Press the REC button.
The “m” mark in the viewfinder or on the LCD
screen will change to the “n” mark, and
recording will start.
During recording, the recording indicator on
the front of DVD video camera/ recorder will
light.
Pressing REC again during recording will set
the DVD video camera/ recorder to the
recording pause status.
- It is recommended that you set the LOCK switch to
(to the left) to prevent the power switch in the “O
VIDEO” position from accidentally moving to“N
PHOTO”.
4
When recording is finished, turn the DVD
video camera/ recorder off.
Note:
• See“Check 1”on page 163 whenrecording movie is not
possible.
• See “Check 4” on page 163 if it takes some time before
recording is possible.
• See “Check 5” on page 164 if the DVD video camera/
recorder does not operate.
• See page 52 for on-screen information display.
• It is recommended that you use DVD-RAM disc from
which recorded contents can be deleted.
49
13
Recording Stills
2
3
Check the subject on the screen (viewfinder or
LCD).
Note:
Recording of still images is possible on DVD-RAM disc
and card.
CARD
ACCESS
indicator
Press the REC button.
ACCESS/PC
indicator
The DVD video camera/ recorder
automatically focuses on the subject at the
center of screen (when auto focus is selected).
The screen will be black, and then the recorded
still will be displayed. When the “m” mark
appears, you can proceed with the next
recording; while “DISC ACCESS” or “CARD
ACCESS” is being displayed, you cannot
proceed with the next recording.
Power switch
1
Turn the DVD camera/ recorder on.
When using DVD-RAM disc:
Set the power switch to “N PHOTO”.
When using card:
4
Set the power switch to “POWER OFF” to turn
the DVD video camera/ recorder off.
Turn power off only after message “DISC
ACCESS” disappears.
Set the power switch to “P PHOTO”.
Note:
After the ACCESS indicator goes out, perform
the subsequent operation:
• See “SIZE AND QUALITY OF PHOTOS” on page 30 for
details of photos on card.
• See “Check 2” on page 163 if recording photos is not
possible.
• Shake of the DVD video camera/recorder may cause
blur in recorded image.
• When holding the DVD video camera/recorder for
recording, grasp it securely with both hands.
• When recording with higher zoom magnification, it is
recommended that you secure the DVD video camera/
recorder on a tripod.
• Do not operate the power switch or remove the card
while the ACCESS/PC or CARD ACCESS indicator is lit
or blinking: Doing so may damage the card or the data
on card.
• With DZ-MV580A, the range of screen in which
recording is possible will be different for movie and still.
50
123
Compensating for Backlight
When subject is lighted from rear, this function will compensate for lighting so that the subject is not too
dark.
1
Press the BLC button during recording.
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM3
0
MIN
Backlight correction icon
8
:
0
0
AM
FINE
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
The backlight correction icon will appear.
Note:
• Pressing the BLC button will alternate between
backlight setting between on and off.
• The backlight setting will automatically return to “off”
when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
51
123
On-Screen Information
Various types of information will appear in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen during recording.
INFORMATION DISPLAY DURING RECORDING
See the next page for details.
e 2. Program AE
k 3. White balance
n 4. EIS
o 5. Manual Focus
m 6. Backlight compensation
p 7. Microphone filter
8. 16:9 mode
9. Video flash
10. Self-timer
11. External Input
12. Recording status
1. Recording mode
Movie recording
time
16. Remainingspace
on disc/card
REC
L IN
0 : 0 0 : 0 0
1 0
13. Zoom
REM
3 0 MIN
FULL AUTO
Exposure correction
FULL AUTO indicator
Warning message
17. Remaining
battery level
DISC ACCESS
18. Brightness/Color
density of LCD
screen or Volume
Current date/time
14. Disc/Card type
15. Movie
8 : 0 0 AM
FINE
9 / 3 0 / 2 0 0 4
Recording quality
The above screen is an example for explanation:
It is different from the actual display.
52
2
8. 16:9 mode* (P.94)
1. Recording mode (P. 49, 50, 98)
G
: Movie
: Still
: External input still (field)
: External input still (frame)
No display: 16:9 mode OFF
: 16:9 mode ON
N
C
C
*3
9. Video flash [when Video Flash (sold
separately) is attached] (only in still recording
2. Program AE (only in movie recording mode)
mode) (P.75)
(P.90)
No display: Emits light automatically
: Always emits light
No display: Auto
b
c
d
e
f
: Sports
: Portrait
: Spotlight
: Sand & Snow
: Low Light
: No light emission
10.Self-timer (only in still recording mode) (P.99)
No display: Self-timer OFF
q
: Self-timer ON (count is from 10
seconds)
3. White balance (P.91)
No display: Auto
11.External Input (P.98)
h
i
j
k
: Set
: Outdoor
: Indoor1
: Indoor2
L IN
S IN
: AV input
: S-VIDEO input
*3
12.Recording status
1
4. Electronic image stabilizer (EIS)* (P.93)
n
m
No display
: During recording
: During recording pause
*4
No display: EIS OFF
n
: EIS ON
5. Manual focus (P.71)
13.Zoom (P.56)
No display: Autofocus
W
o
: (display in English or German):
(Digital Zoom: Off)
Manual focus
X
: (display in French or Italian):
Manual focus
(Digital Zoom: 40×)
Y
: (display in Spanish): Manual focus
(Digital Zoom: 500× (DZ-MV550A),
240× (DZ-MV580A), only in movie
recording mode)
6. Backlight compensation (P.51)
No display: Backlight compensation OFF
14.Disc/Card type
m
: Backlight compensation ON
I
K
: DVD-RAM
: DVD-R
7. Microphone filter (only in movie recording
mode) (P.93)
J : DVD-RAM (write-protected)
M
: DVD-R disc already finalized on this
DVD video camera/ recorder
: DVD-R disc finalized on a device
other than this DVD video camera/
recorder
No display: Microphone filter OFF
p
: Microphone filter ON
N
O
: SD memory card or
MultiMediaCard
P
No display
: Locked SD memory card
*5
53
*6
15.Movie recording quality
16.Remaining space on disc/card
(only when using disc) (P.96)
*7
REM XX MIN
: Remaining recordable
minutes during movie
recording
: Number of remaining
recordable still images during
still recording
XTRA
LPCM
: Best quality (only when using DVD-
RAM disc)
: Best audio quality (only when using
DVD-R disc)
*8
REM XX
FINE
STD
: High quality
: Standard quality
17.Remaining battery level (P.42)
Still recording quality
(only when using card) (P.97)
w(full charge)
x
FINE
NORM
ECO
: High quality
y
: Standard quality
: Number of recordable stills is
prioritized
z(low remaining charge)
18.Brightness/Color density of LCD screen or
Volume (P. 58, 101)
:
The volume can be adjusted during external
input and playback.
*1 EIS cannot be used when recording stills on DZ-MV580A.
*2 Not displayed on DZ-MV550A. Displayed on DZ-MV580A only when a DVD-RAM disc is used in the movie
recording mode.
*3 Not displayed on DZ-MV550A.
*4 When no disc or card is in the DVD video camera/recorder, or disc has not yet been initialized, a write-protected
disc or locked card, or a disc or card with no remaining space, has been inserted.
*5 When a disc or card that cannot be used in this DVD video camera/recorder is inserted
*6 No remaining time or number will be displayed with a protected disc or locked card, or finalized DVD-R disc.
*7 In XTRA mode, possible recording time may be longer than the displayed time.
*8 The displayed number of recordable stills is for reference: This number may not decrease, depending on the
recording conditions (not displayed with a DVD-R disc).
●Switching the information display mode
You can switch the display mode of on-screen information:
Press the DISPLAY button.
The full and minimum display modes will alternate.
• Full display mode: All types of information will appear.
• Minimum display mode: The recording mode (see 1 on page
52) and recording status (see 12 on page 52) will appear. If the
DVD video camera/ recorder has warning information, a warning message will appear.
Note:
The DVD video camera/recorder does not record the date and time as a part of image. However, this information during
recording will be recorded with image as data which can be checked on Disc Navigation screen during playback (see
“Information Display During Playback” on page 62).
54
●Display when recording an image of yourself
When recording with the LCD screen facing the same direction as the lens,
the operating status will appear, and in addition, the battery remaining level
will blink when the battery has almost no remaining charge.
The following operating status indicator will light or blink to give warning
message to user. The message can be checked when returning the LCD
monitor 180° to the original status from the status in which the LCD screen
was facing the same direction as the lens.
No warning/ message (see page 52) will appear when recording with the LCD screen facing the same
direction as the lens.
Instead, the following screen display symbols will blink to inform you of the operation status of DVD
video camera/ recorder.
When the LCD monitor is turned 180° from the position with the LCD screen facing the same direction
as the lens, the warning/ message can be checked.
Operating status/
warning message
Screen
display
symbol
Description
Battery remaining
level
• A write-protected disc is loaded.
• A locked card is loaded.
Q
• An unusable card is loaded.
• An attempt to record a still is being made with a
DVD-R disc used.
• An unusable disc is loaded.
N
• The remaining capacity ondiscisapproaching0.
k
• The remaining capacity on disc or card is
approaching 0.
• There is no remaining capacity on disc or card.
• An attempt to record a copy-guarded image is
being made.
l
Note:
• If the LCD screen is set facing the same direction as the lens, the LCD screen will display a mirror image (left and right
reversed).
• If the LCD screen is set facing the same direction as the lens, you can also view subject image in the viewfinder.
• Although you can switch to the manual focus, exposure and on-screen display modes even during recording with LCD
screen facing the same direction as lens, they will not appear on the screen.
55
123
Zooming
If you continue to hold the zoom lever on the “T”
control side with Dig. Zoom 40x or 240x specified,
the digital zoom will be activated midway (when
optical 18-power is exceeded on DZ-MV550A or
optical 10-power is exceeded on DZ-MV580A).
You can zoom up to 500-power on DZ-MV550A;
up to 240-power on DZ-MV580A.
Note:
• The digital zoom setting will be stored in memory even
if the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
• You can also use the DIGITAL ZOOM button on remote
control to switch the digital zoom setting: Pressing the
button during movie recording will switch the setting
between “Off”, “40×” and “500x” (on DZ-MV550A) or
“240x”(onDZ-MV580A):Pressingthebuttonduring still
recording will switch between “Off” and “40×”.
• If you set zoom to 500× (DZ-MV550A), 240× (DZ-
MV580A)whenrecordingstill,thedigitalzoomwillbeup
to 40×.
W: recording wide area
(wide-angle)
• When a subject is zoomed, it may be momentarily out of
focus.
• When digital zoom is engaged, the image quality will be
rougher.
T: recording enlarged
image (telephoto)
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “Dig. Zoom” on
the “Camera Functions
Setup” menu screen,and
then press the A
button.
Ca
m
e r a F u nc
t
i
on s Se t u p
AE
h i t e Ba l .
P r og r a
m
W
E
D i
I
S
g
.
Z
F
o om
t e r
2 4 0 x
4 0 x
M IC .
i
l
Of
f
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
*
2
3
Choose the desired
magnification, and then press the A button.
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
Moving the zoom lever will display the digital
zoom bar.
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM3
0
MIN
8
:
0
0
AM
FINE
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
When Dig. Zoom is "Off"
W
T
When Dig. Zoom is "On"(40x)
W
T
Digital zoom range
When Dig. Zoom is "On"(240x)
(only in movie recording)
W
*
T
Digital zoom range
*500x will appear on DZ-MV550A; 240x will
appear on DZ-MV580A.
56
MACRO RECORDING
Use the macro function when recording a small object from close-up position: You can shoot the subject
as close as approximately 13/ 16” (2 cm) from the lens surface, magnifying the image to fill the screen.
1
Aim the DVD video camera/ recorder at the
subject, and press down the zoom lever to “W”
control side.
Note:
• Zoom can be used, but the subject may not be focused,
depending on the distance to the subject. In this case,
move the zoom to “W” control side to focus.
• Theamountoflighttendstobeinsufficientduringmacro
recording:Ifthesubjectimageistoodark,useadditional
lighting.
RECORDING SUBJECTS FOR STRONGER WIDE-ANGLE OR TELEPHOTO
EFFECT
Use tele-conversion lens or wide-conversion lens with a filter diameter of37mm and thread pitch of0.75
mm, to record subjects for stronger telephoto or wide-angle effect.
1
Remove the lens hood from DVD video
camera/ recorder.
2
Remove the cap of conversion lens, and screw
the lens into the filter thread of DVD video
camera/ recorder until it stops.
Lens hood
Conversion lens
(Remove)
(Attach)
• Tele-conversion lens (DZ-TL1): For stronger telephoto effect
• Wide-conversion lens (DZ-WL1): For stronger wide-angle effect
Note:
• Be careful not to lose the removed lens hood.
• WithDZ-TL1tele-conversionlens, thefocusingrangeat
“T” (telephoto) control side is between approx. 5 m and
infinite.
• When a conversion lens is attached, note that if you
zoom in on a subject, vignetting will slightly occur on the
“W”(wide-angle)controlside(thefourcornersofscreen
will be dim).
• When replacing the lens, take care not to drop the DVD
video camera/recorder.
57
Playing Back
• Insert a disc or card recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder (P. 49,
50).
Before You Begin
• Turn the DVD video camera/recorder on (P. 48).
123
PLAYING BACK
Note:
• If the LCD monitor is open during playback of movie,
playback sound will be heard from the speaker. Adjust
the sound volume using the volume control buttons (S,
R).
• To temporarily stop playback, press the A button.
Press the A button again to restart playback.
• Even ifyou stop playback midwayand immediately start
recordingagain,thenewimagewillberecordedafterthe
last scene on disc or card (the previous images will not
be overwritten).
• Image data edited on PC or certain types of image data
may not appear on this DVD video camera/recorder.
• Image data recorded on another camcorder may not be
playable on this DVD video camera/recorder.
• Depending on the amount of data to be played back, it
may take some time for the playback image to appear.
• Do not operate the power switch or remove the card
while the ACCESS/PC or CARD ACCESS indicator is lit
or blinking: Doing so may damage the card or the data
on card.
Tilt up/down and to left/
right to select, and then
press A to designate.
1
2
Press A button in the recording pause status.
The DVD video camera/ recorder will enter the
playback mode, and the scene you have
recorded last will be played back. (For “scene”,
see P. 105 and “Terminology”, P. 160.)
When playback is finished, the DVD video
camera/ recorder will enter the pause status at
the last image on disc.
If the playback pause status continues for as
long as 5 minutes, the DVD video camera/
recorder will automatically return to the
recording pause status.
Press the C button.
Playback will stop, and recording pause status
will be restored.
58
123
12
PLAYBACK FROM START OF DISC OR CARD
Use the Go To function (P. 61) or Disc Navigation
function (P. 105) to play back from the start of disc
or card.
SEARCH PLAYBACK OF MOVIE
During playback, tilt the joystick to right or left
and hold it: Search playback will start.
Note:
• When you skip or search scenes from playback or
playback pause, the screen will be dark briefly.
• See page 163 if search playback does not operate
normally.
Hold to right
: Scenes will be visually
scanned forward
Hold to left
: Scenes will be visually
scanned backward
Release the joystick when you find the desired
image:Normal playback will start from that point.
12
FRAME ADVANCE/FRAME BACK/SLOW PLAYBACK OF MOVIE
During playback pause, tilt the joystick: Frame
advance, frame back or slow playback will start.
Note:
• Inslowplayback,arapidlymovingsubjectimagemaybe
distorted.
Tilt to right once
: Picture will advance
one frame.
• The intervals for playing back frames in frame advance/
frame back/slow playback are as follows:
Frame advance and forward slow: Approx. 0.03 second
Frame back and reverse slow: Approx. 0.5 second
• No sound will be heard during search playback or slow
playback.
Tilt to left once
: Picture will go back
one frame.
Hold to right
Hold to left
: Forward slow playback
: Reverse slow playback
After frame advance, frame back or slow
playback, the DVD video camera/ recorder will
enter the playback pause status.
59
12
SKIP PLAYBACK OF MOVIE
During playback, tilt the joystick up or down to
locate the start of desired scene.
Portion being played back
Tilt down once
:
To skip to the first image of the
scene following the one being
played back, and start
playback.
Tilt up twice
Tilt up once Tilt down once Tilt down twice
Scene 1
Scene 2
Scene 3
Tilt up once
Hold down
:
:
To return to the first image of
the scene being played back,
and start playback.
Portion being played back
Tilt down once
Tilt up once
Tilt down twice
Scene 3
To continuously locate the
beginnings of scenes, starting
from the scene following the
scene being played back.
When the desired image
appears, release the joystick:
Playback will start from that
point.
Scene 1
Scene 2
Tiltingupthejoystickataportionseveralsecondsfrom
the start of scene being played back will return to the
start of the scene preceding that being played back.
Note:
• If you perform skip playback during playback pause, the
DVD video camera/recorder will enter the playback
pause status at the beginning of the located scene.
• Tilting down in the last scene on disc will set the DVD
video camera/recorder to the playback pause status at
the last image.
Hold up
:
To continuously locate the
beginnings of scenes
backward, starting from the
scene preceding the scene
currently being played back.
When the desired image
appears, release the joystick:
Playback will start from that
point.
• See “Check 3” on page 163 if skip playback does not
operate normally.
13
PLAYING BACK STILLS
Tilt the joystick up or down during playback to
quickly play back stills in sequence.
[When using disc]
Releasing the joystick will start continuous
playback.
Tilt down once
:
To display stills one by one
forward
Tilt up once
:
To display stills one by one
backward
[When using card]
When the joystick is released, the photo at that
point will be displayed, and then the DVD video
camera/ recorder will enter the playback pause
status.
Set the slide show function for continuous display
(P. 139).
60
123
JUMPING TO SPECIFIED POINT (GO TO)
1
2
Press the MENU button
during playback.
Top
End
:To go to the start, and enter playback
pause.
:To go to the end oflast scene,and enter
playback pause.
Go To
To p
En d
Spec
i
f
y
Choose the option (point
you want to go to), and
then press the A
button.
Specify :To go to a specified point and enter
playback pause. See the following for
details.
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
●Specifying the point to view
1
Choose “Specify” in step 2 above, and then
press the A button.
3
Press the A button to enter the selection.
The DVD video camera/ recorder will go to the
specified point and enter the playback pause
status.
The screen for specifying the point to go to will
appear.
Pressing A again will start playback.
Position of currently
played back image
Totalrecordingtimeof
all selected scenes
To cancelthe“Go To” procedure midway,press the
C button before going to the specified point.
Go
t
o
TOP
0: 00: 00
CURRENT
0: 03: 26
END
0: 24: 24
Note:
Cursor
• IfmultiplescenesareselectedusingtheDiscNavigation
function or SELECT button, choosing “Top” will jump to
the beginning of selected scenes (P. 133).
• When multiple scenes are selected, the total time of
selected scenes will appear in the “total recording time”
display.
GO TO 0: 03: 26
TOP END
CANCEL
ENTER
Cursor position
• With card, the number of stills will appear at the “TOP”,
“CURRENT”, “END” and “GO TO” indicators.
• The cursor may not move at same-pitch intervals.
2
Use the joystick to select the desired time of
chosen point.
Tilt up
Tilt down
Tilt to left or right
·Press once:
:
:
:
To select the start.
To select the end.
To move the cursor in 10-
second units (1-still units
for card)
·Hold down: To move the cursor in 1-
minute units (10-still
units for card)
Go
t
o
TOP
0: 00: 00
CURRENT
0: 03: 26
END
0: 24: 24
GO TO 0: 00 : 00
TOP END
CANCEL
ENTER
(When the start of scene is selected)
Cursor at current image position.
Cursor at (GO TO) position.
61
123
On-Screen Information Display
INFORMATION DISPLAY DURING PLAYBACK
Various types of information on recording will be superimposed on playback image you are viewing.
No display
Playback information
display
Recording date/time
*1 O (VIDEO) or N (PHOTO); Only N (PHOTO)
with card.
●Switching the information display
mode
Press the DISPLAY button: You can switch the
display mode of on-screen information.
*2 8 Program or 5 Play List
*3 Number of program or play list being played
back (not displayed when allprogramsare being
played back)
When using disc:
*4 Refer to “Disc/ Card type” on page 53.
*5Y :Willappear when each function isspecified
“On”
*1
Recording mode
*5
Scene No.
Repeat play
*6 a :Standard playback
b
:Playback pause
c :Forward search playback
d :Reverse search playback
e :Forward skip playback
f :Reverse skip playback
g :Forward frame advance
h :Reverse frame back
Refer to “Playing Back” beginning on page 58
for how to operate.
The “j” mark will appear on the first image on
disc.
06
006
RAM
0 : 00 : 16
Playback
operation
*6
Counter
*4
Disc type
*3
Program No. or Play List No.
*2
Program or Play List
The “i” mark will appear on the last image on
disc.
When using card:
*5
Scene No. File name
Lock
• Recording date/time display: Shows the date/
time when recording was started. Even when
playback starts, the date/ time display will not
advance.
• No display: No information will appear.
However,when the mode ofplayback operation
is switched, the symbol will appear for approx.
3 seconds.
*5
DPOF
Slide Show
*5
003
100—0003
*1
*6
Recording mode
Playback operation
Note:
See “Using Disc Navigation” on page 105 and later for
explanation on program and play list.
62
Checking Flow of Quick Mode
The following two on-screen menu modes are available with this DVD video camera/recorder:
• Quick mode: To display only the fundamental menu items for first timers
• Advanced mode: To display all menu items for experts (P.87)
Camera Functions
Set the QUICK MODE switch to
ON, and then, while the camera image is being displayed on the
LCD monitor, press the MENU button: The menu of Quick mode will appear.
Only the fundamental menu items will appear in the Quick mode, and the explanation of the function
on which the cursor is positioned will be displayed across the bottom of menu (No explanation on
function will appear in the Advanced mode.).
Tilt the joystick up, down, to left or right to select a menu item, and then press the A button to choose
the option.
See page 89 for how to set the menu.
No menu appears during recording.
1
Set the QUICK MODE switch to
ON.
2
Press the MENU button.
<How to interpret the menu screen>
Display of selected
setup item
R e c o r d F u n c
t
i
o n s S e
t
u p
Options settable
V I DEO
M
o d e
F I NE
I
n p u
t
S o u r c e
Selection of setup items
T : Record Functions
Setup
S e
l
e c
t
t
h e
m
o v
i
e
q u a
l
i
t
y .
U
W
: Date Setup
: Initial Setup
Display of disc or card
being used (P. 52)
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
Guide display
Functions settable
Explanation on function
63
12
FLOW OF QUICK MODE WHEN RECORDING MOVIE:
The following shows the menu when DVD-RAM disc is being used:
Thedetailsofeach function aredescribed on thepagesshowing theAdvanced mode:Seeeach referencepage.
●Record Functions Setup
(P. 9 6 )
R e
c
o
r
V
I
d
I
n
F
DEO
u
u
n
c
M
S o
t
o
i
d
u
o
e
r
n
c
s
S e
:
:
t
F
CA
u
I
p
NE
M
R e
c
o
r
V
I
d
I
n
F
DEO
u
u
n
c
M
S o
t
o
i
d
u
o
e
r
n
c
s
S e
t
F
u
I
p
NE
R e
c
o
r
V
I
d
I
n
F
DEO
u
u
n
c
M
S o
t
o
i
d
u
o
e
r
n
c
s
S e
t
u
p
X T RA
F
p
t
e
ERA
p
t
e
p
t
e
I
NE
S T D
S e
l
e
c
t
t
h
e
m
o
v
i
e
q
u
a
l
i
t
y .
F
i
n
e
I
m
a
g
e
Q u
a
l
i
t
y .
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
(P. 98)
R e
c
c
o
t
r
V
I
d
I
n
F
DEO
u
u
n
r
c
M
S o
t
o
i
d
u
o
e
r
n
c
s
S e
t
u
p
R e
c
l
o
l
r
V
I
d
I
n
F
DEO
u
u
n
e
c
M
S o
t
o
i
d
u
o
e
r
n
c
s
S e
t
u
p
p
t
e
CA
M
a
ERA
p
t
e
CA
M
ERA
L
S
t
I
NE
L
o
I
n.
NE
*
S e
l
e
t
h
e
e
c
e
i
v
i
n
g
i
m
g
e.
U s
u
a
y
s
e
l
c
t
t
h
i
s
o
p
i
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
*
DisplayedonDZ-MV580A
only.
●Date Setup
(P. 37)
D a
t
e
S e
t
u
p
D a
t
t
e
h
S e
t
u
r
p
D a
t
e
S e
t
D a
t
e
S e
t
9
t
/
3
0
8
/
:
2
0
0
0 A
0
4
M
S e
t
e
c
u
r
e
n
t
d
a
e
a n d
t
i
m
e.
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
●Initial Setup
(P. 102)
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
I
n
p
i
t
i
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
e
B e
L
D e
e
n
m
p
g
o
:
:
:
O n
E n
A u
B e
L
D e
e
n
m
h
p
g
o
e
O n
B e
L
D e
s
e
n
m
h
p
g
o
e
O n
a
u
a
g
o
e
d
g
t
l
o
i
s
h
a
u
a
M
o
g
o
p
e
d
e
a
u
a
a
M
r
g
o
d.
e
d
O
f
f
M
e
e
r
S e
O n
l
/
e
O
c
f
t
f
t
a
t
a
t
i
g
i
n
g
s
o
u
n
d
B e
e
.
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
M
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
(P. 103)
I
n
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
I
n
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
E n
g
a
p
u
a
l
n
a
t
i
s
a
o
c
a
h
i
l
h
n
B e
L
D e
t
e
n
m
h
p
g
o
e
B e
L
D e
t
e
n
m
h
p
g
o
e
F
E
r
s
ç
ñ
s
i
s
a
u
a
M
l
g
o
a
e
d
n
E n
e
g
d
l
i
i
s
h
l
a
u
a
M
l
g
o
a
e
d
n
e
g
e
g
D e
C h
a
g
e
u
s
p
a
y .
C h
a
g
e
u
I
t
l
o
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
(P. 159)
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
B e
L
D e
d
g.
e
n
m
e
p
g
o
B e
L
D e
d
e
n
m
m
3
p
g
o
o
A u
t
f
a
f
o
a
u
o
a
M
n
g
o
s
e
d
t
a
u
a
M
s
i
g
o
t
e
d
r
O
S
f
t
e
r
A u
t
o
m
e
a
t
r
t
t
S e
l
t
e
t
c
i
t
n
m
a
o
n
o
d
e
S
a
t
p
a
p
r
r
t
o
e
n
m
t
e
i
o
n
a
e
r
s
e
x .
n
u
s .
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
64
12
FLOW OF QUICK MODE WHEN RECORDING PHOTO (DISC):
The following shows the menu when DVD-RAM disc is being used:
The details of each function are described on pages showing the Advanced mode: See each reference page.
●Record Functions Setup
(P. 98)
R e
c
o
r
I
d
n
F
u
f
u
t
n
T
c
S o
i
t
i
u
e
o
r
r
n
c
s
e
S e
t
u
CA
L
S
p
R e
c
o
r
I
d
n
F
u
f
u
t
n
T
c
S o
i
t
i
u
e
o
r
r
n
c
s
e
S e
t
u
p
M
R e
c
o
r
I
d
n
F
u
f
u
t
n
T
c
S o
i
t
i
u
e
o
r
r
n
c
s
e
S e
:
:
t
u
p
M
f
p
l
M
ERA
p
l
CA
ERA
p
l
CA
O
ERA
S e
m
I
NE
S e
m
S e
m
f
L
I
NE
U s
u
a
l
l
y
s
e
l
e
c
t
t
h
i
s
o
p
t
i
o
n.
S e
l
e
c
t
t
h
e
r
e
c
e
i
v
i
n
g
i
m
a
g
e.
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
(P. 99)
R e
c
o
r
I
d
n
F
u
f
u
t
n
T
c
S o
i
t
i
u
e
o
r
r
n
c
s
e
S e
t
u
p
R e
c
c
o
t
r
I
d
n
F
u
f
u
t
n
T
c
S o
i
t
i
u
e
o
r
r
n
c
s
e
S e
t
u
f
p
f
p
l
p
l
S e
m
O n
O
S e
m
O
f
f
C a
n
c
c
o
e
r
l
d
t
h
e
s
e
l
f
t
i
m
e
r
S e
l
e
t
h
e
s
e
l
f
t
i
m
e
r
.
r
e
i
n g.
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
●Date Setup
(P. 37)
D a
t
e
S e
t
u
p
D a
t
t
e
h
S e
t
u
r
p
D a
t
e
S e
t
D a
t
e
S e
t
9
t
/
3
0
8
/
:
2
0
0
0 A
0
4
M
S e
t
e
c
u
r
e
n
t
d
a
e
a n d
t
i
m
e.
EN T ER
RE T URN
RAM
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
●Initial Setup
(P. 102)
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
I
n
p
i
t
i
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
e
B e
L
D e
e
n
m
p
g
o
:
:
:
O n
E n
A u
B e
L
D e
e
n
m
h
p
g
o
e
O n
B e
L
D e
s
e
n
m
h
p
O n
a
u
a
g
o
e
d
g
t
l
o
i
s
h
a
u
a
M
o
g
o
p
e
d
e
a
g
o
e
u
a
a
M
r
g
o
d.
e
d
O
f
f
M
e
e
r
S e
O n
l
/
e
O
c
f
t
f
t
a
t
i
n
g
s
o
u
n
d
B e
e
.
EN T ER
RE T URN
RAM
EN T ER
RE T URN
RAM
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
(P. 103)
I
n
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
I
n
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
E n
g
a
p
u
a
l
n
a
t
i
s
a
o
c
a
h
i
l
h
n
B e
L
D e
t
e
n
m
p
g
o
B e
L
D e
t
e
n
m
h
p
g
o
e
F
E
r
s
ç
ñ
s
i
s
a
u
a
M
l
g
o
a
e
d
n
E n
e
g
d
l
i
i
s
h
l
a
u
a
M
l
g
o
a
e
d
n
e
g
e
g
D e
C h
a
g
e
he
u
a
g
s
p
a
y .
C h
a
g
e
u
I
t
l
o
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
(P. 159)
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
B e
e
n
m
e
p
g
o
B e
e
n
m
m
3
p
g
o
o
A u
t
f
a
f
o
L
a
u
o
a
M
n
g
o
s
e
d
t
L
a
u
a
M
s
i
g
o
t
e
d
r
O
S
f
t
D e
d
g.
e
r
A u
t
o
m
D e
e
a
t
r
t
t
S e
l
t
e
t
c
i
t
n
m
a
t
i
o
n
o
d
e
S
a
t
p
a
p
r
r
t
o
d
e
n
m
t
e
i
o
n
a
e
r
s
e
x .
n
u
s .
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
Note:
No photo can be recorded on DVD-R disc.
65
3
FLOW OF QUICK MODE WHEN RECORDING PHOTO (CARD):
The details of each function are described on pages showing the Advanced mode: See each reference
page.
●Record Functions Setup
(P. 97)
R e
c
o
r
d
F
l
u
f
u
i
t
n
t
c
y
S o
t
i
o
n
c
s
S e
t
u
F
NOR
ECO
p
I
R e
c
o
r
d
F
l
u
f
u
i
t
n
t
c
y
S o
t
i
o
n
c
s
S e
t
F
CA
O
u
I
p
NE
M
f
R e
c
o
r
d
F
l
u
f
u
i
t
n
t
c
y
S o
t
i
o
n
c
s
S e
t
F
u
I
p
NE
Q u
I
S e
a
p
l
NE
M
Q u
I
S e
a
p
l
:
:
:
Q u
I
S e
a
p
l
n
u
e
r
r
e
ERA
n
u
e
r
r
e
n
u
e
r
r
e
T
i
m
f
T
p
i
m
T
i
m
S e
S e
S e
l
e
c
t
t
h
e
h
o
t
o
q
u
a
l
i
t
y .
F
i
n
e
I
m
a
g
e
Q u
a
l
i
t
y .
EN T ER
RE T URN
EN T ER
RE T URN
EN T ER
RE T URN
(P. 98)
R e
c
c
o
t
r
d
F
l
u
f
u
i
n
t
c
y
t
i
o
n
c
s
S e
t
u
p
R e
c
l
o
l
r
d
F
l
u
f
u
i
n
t
c
y
t
i
o
n
c
s
S e
t
u
p
Q u
I
S e
a
p
l
Q u
I
S e
a
p
l
n
t
S o
u
e
r
r
e
CA
M
a
ERA
n
t
S o
u
e
r
r
e
CA
M
ERA
T
r
i
m
T
e
i
m
L
S
t
I
NE
L
o
I
n.
NE
l
e
t
h
e
e
c
e
i
v
i
n
g
i
m
g
e.
U s
u
a
y
s
e
l
c
t
t
h
i
s
o
p
i
EN T ER
RE T URN
EN T ER
RE T URN
(P. 99)
R e
c
c
o
t
r
d
F
l
u
f
u
i
n
t
c
y
t
i
o
n
c
s
S e
t
u
f
p
f
R e
c
o
r
d
F
l
u
f
u
i
n
t
c
y
t
i
o
n
c
s
S e
t
u
p
Q u
I
S e
a
p
l
Q u
I
S e
a
p
l
n
t
S o
u
e
r
r
e
n
t
S o
u
e
r
r
e
T
s
i
m
O
.
T
s
i
m
O n
O
f
f
l
e
t
h
e
e
l
f
t
i
m
e
r
C a
n
c
c
o
e
r
l
d
t
n
h
e
g.
e
l
f
t
i
m
e
r
r
e
i
EN T ER
RE T URN
EN T ER
RE T URN
●Date Setup
(P. 37)
D a
t
e
S e
t
u
p
D a
t
t
e
h
S e
t
u
r
p
D a
t
e
S e
t
D a
t
e
S e
t
9
t
/
3
0
8
/
:
2
0
0
0 A
0
4
M
S e
t
e
c
u
r
e
n
t
d
a
e
a
n
d
t
i
m
e.
EN T ER
RE T URN
EN T ER
RE T URN
66
●Initial Setup
(P. 102)
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
I
n
p
i
t
i
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
e
B e
L
D e
e
n
m
p
g
o
:
:
:
O n
E n
A u
B e
L
D e
e
n
m
h
p
g
o
e
O n O n
B e
L
D e
s
e
n
m
h
p
g
o
e
O n
a
u
a
g
o
e
d
g
t
l
o
i
s
h
a
u
a
M
o
g
o
p
e
d
e
a
u
a
a
M
r
g
o
d.
e
d
O
f
f
M
e
e
r
S e
O n
l
/
e
O
c
f
t
f
t
a
t
a
t
i
g
i
n
g
s
o
u
n
d
B e
e
.
EN T ER
RE T URN
EN T ER
RE T URN
EN T ER
RE T URN
(P. 103)
I
n
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
I
n
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
E n
g
a
p
u
a
l
n
a
t
i
s
a
o
c
a
h
i
l
h
n
B e
L
D e
t
e
n
m
h
p
g
o
e
B e
L
D e
t
e
n
m
h
p
g
o
e
F
E
r
s
ç
ñ
s
i
s
a
u
a
M
l
g
o
a
e
d
n
E n
e
g
d
l
i
i
s
h
l
a
u
a
M
l
g
o
a
e
d
n
e
g
e
g
D e
C h
a
g
e
u
s
p
a
y .
C h
a
g
e
u
I
t
l
o
EN T ER
RE T URN
EN T ER
RE T URN
(P. 159)
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
S e
t
u
p
E n
g
o
l
i
s
h
E n
g
o
l
i
s
h
B e
L
D e
d
g.
e
n
m
e
p
g
o
B e
L
D e
d
e
n
m
m
3
p
g
o
o
A u
f
t
t
f
a
f
a
u
o
a
M
n
g
o
s
e
d
t
a
u
a
M
s
i
g
o
t
e
d
r
O
S
e
r
A u
t
o
e
a
t
r
t
t
e
S e
l
t
e
t
c
i
t
n
m
a
o
n
m
d
e
S
a
t
p
a
p
r
r
t
o
e
n
m
t
e
i
o
n
a
r
s
e
x .
n
u
s .
EN T ER
RE T URN
EN T ER
RE T URN
67
Disc Navigation Functions
Set the QUICK MODE switch to
ON, and then, while Disc Navigation screen is being displayed
on the LCD monitor, press the MENU button: The menu of Quick mode will appear.
Only the fundamental menu items will appear in the Quick mode, and the explanation of the function
on which the cursor is positioned will be displayed across the bottom ofmenu (except during recording).
1
2
Set the QUICK MODE switch to
ON.
3
Select a scene, and then press the MENU
button.
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
1
FLOW OF QUICK MODE (WITH DVD-RAM DISC):
The details of each function are described on pages showing the Advanced mode: See each reference
page.
●Scene
(P. 111)
S
c
e
n
e
S
c
e
n
e
D e
E d
C o
l
i
p
e
t
y
t
e
D e
E d
C o
l
i
p
e
t
y
t
e
c
ETC
ETC
D e
l
e
t
e
s
e
l
e
t
e
d
s
c
e
n
e.
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RAM
(P. 115)
S
c
e
n
t
e
S
c
e
n
e
D e
E d
C o
l
i
p
e
t
y
t
e
D e
E d
C o
l
i
p
e
t
y
t
e
F
a
d
e
F
a
d
n
e
b
ETC
ETC
E d
i
s
c
e
n
e
s .
A d
a
d
d
f
o
a
r
d
i
n
n
g
d
t
o
o
f
t
s
h
c
e
e
e
g
i
n
n
i
n
g
n
/
e
e.
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
(P. 118)
S
c
e
n
e
D e
E d
C o
l
i
p
e
t
y
t
e
l
ETC
C o
p
y
c
t
r
h
e
s
e
e
c
t
e
d
p
h
o
t
o
t
o
a
d.
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
68
●Disc
(P. 134)
D
i
s
c
D
i
s
c
C a
p
a
c
i
t
y
C a
p
a
a
i
c
i
i
t
y
ETC
ETC
S h o w
r
e
m
n
n
g
f
r
e
e
s
p
a
c
e
o
n
d
i
s
c .
EN T ER
RE T URN
RAM
EN T ER
RE T URN
RAM
●Others
(P. 138)
O
t
h
e
r
s
O
t
h
e
r
s
O
t
h
e
c
r
s
l
ETC
ETC
ETC
R e
p
e
a
t
P
l
a
y
:
O
f
f
R e
p
h
e
e
a
t
P
p
l
a
a
y
t
O
a
f
f
R e
r
p
e
e
p
a
e
t
P
l
a
l
y
O n
O
f
f
S e
s
l
t
e
t
c
i
t
n
t
g.
r
e
e
p
l
y
C a
n
e
a
t
p
a
y .
e
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
2
FLOW OF QUICK MODE (WITH DVD-R DISC):
The details of each function are described on pages showing the Advanced mode: See each reference
page.
●Disc
(P. 134)
D
i
s
c
D
i
s
c
C a
p
n
a
a
c
l
i
i
t
z
y
e
C a
p
n
a
a
c
l
i
i
t
z
y
e
ETC
ETC
F
i
D
i
s
c
F
i
D
f
i
s
c
S h o w
r
e
m
a
i
n
i
n
g
r
e
e
s
p
a
c
e
o
n
d
i
s
c .
EN T ER
RE T URN
R
EN T ER
RE T URN
R
(P. 137)
D
F
i
s
c
C a
p
n
a
a
c
l
i
i
t
z
y
e
ETC
F
i
D
d
i
i
s
s
c
i
n
a
l
i
z
e
DVD
-
R
c .
EN T ER
RE T URN
R
●Others
(P. 138)
O
t
h
e
r
s
O
t
h
e
r
s
O
t
h
e
c
r
s
l
ETC
ETC
ETC
R e
p
e
a
t
P
l
a
y
:
O
f
f
R e
p
h
e
e
a
t
P
p
l
a
a
y
t
O
a
f
f
R e
r
p
e
e
p
a
e
t
P
l
a
l
y
O n
O
f
f
S e
s
l
t
e
t
c
i
t
n
t
g.
r
e
e
p
l
y
C a
n
e
a
t
p
a
y .
e
EN T ER
RE T URN
R
EN T ER
RE T URN
R
EN T ER
RE T URN
R
Note:
The menu item “Capacity” or “Finalize Disc” will not appear with a finalized DVD-R disc.
69
3
FLOW OF QUICK MODE (WITH CARD):
The details of each function are described on pages showing the Advanced mode: See each reference
page.
(P. 111)
S
c
e
n
e
S
c
e
n
e
D e
l
e
t
e
D e
l
e
l
t
e
D e
l
e
t
e
s
e
e
c
t
e
d
p
h
o
t
o.
EN T ER
RE T URN
EN T ER
RE T URN
(P. 134)
C a
r
d
C a
r
d
C a
p
a
c
i
t
y
C a
p
a
a
i
c
i
i
t
y
S h o w
r
r
e
m
n
n
g
f
r
e
e
s
p
a
c
e
o
n
c
a
d.
EN T ER
RE T URN
EN T ER
RE T URN
(P. 139)
S
l
i
d
e
S h o w
S
S
l
l
i
i
d
d
e
e
S h o w
A
l
l
A
p
l
l
l
a
y
a
l
l
s
c
e
n
e
s .
EN T ER
RE T URN
EN T ER
RE T URN
70
123
Manually Focusing Subject
The DVD video camera/recorder usually focuses on a subject automatically (autofocus). You can also
manually focus a subject depending on the recording conditions.
FOCUSING DURING RECORDING
Normally, the DVD video camera/ recorder automatically focuses the subject (auto-focus), but you can
also manually focus a subject, depending on the recording conditions (manual focus).
Focusing range
You can switch the display mode of on-screen information:
• On T (tele) side: approximately 3.6 feet (1 m) from lens surface to infinity
• On W (wide) side: approximately 13/ 16" (2 cm) from lens surface to infinity
1
Press the FOCUS button during recording.
“MF” will appear on the screen.
Manual Focus icon
2
3
Press the zoom lever down to “T” controlside to
zoom in on subject.
Adjust with S and
R buttons
Use the S R buttons to adjust the focus, while
viewing the image in the viewfinder or on the
LCD screen.
Note:
• Pressing FOCUS will alternate between manual focus
andautofocus.Withautofocus,noindicationwillappear
on the screen.
• Be sure to zoom in on your subject before manually
focusing on it. If you bring the subject into focus at the
“W” control side, focus will be faulty when you turn the
zoom lever to the “T” control side to zoom in on the
subject.
• Manual focus is released when the DVD video camera/
recorder is turned off. When you turn the DVD video
camera/recorder on next time, auto focus will be
restored.
71
Manually focus the following objects, which may not be automatically focused (see page 71):
Objects not in
the center of
screen
Objects with
little variation
in brightness,
such as white
wall
Objects that
are far and
near at the
same time
Objects
moving rapidly
Objects lit by
neon sign,
spotlight, etc.
whichglaresor
emits strong
light
Dark objects
Object behind
glass with
Night view
waterdroplets,
dirt on it
72
123
Adjusting Brightness of Image to be recorded
(Exposure)
The DVD video camera/recorder usually adjusts the exposure automatically. You can also manually
adjust the exposure depending on the recording conditions.
1
Press the EXPOSURE button during recording.
The exposure indicator will appear on the
screen.
Adjust with S and R buttons
Exposure indicator
Note:
• Pressing EXPOSURE will alternate between manual
adjustment and auto exposure. With auto exposure, no
indication will appear on the screen.
• The exposure setting will return to Auto when the DVD
video camera/recorder is turned off.
2
Use the S R buttons to adjust the exposure,
while viewing the image in the viewfinder or on
the LCD screen.
73
123
Using Full Auto Function
Pressing the FULL AUTO button will fully automate the camera functions.
1
Press the FULL AUTO button.
“FULL AUTO” will be displayed on the screen
of DVD video camera/ recorder for several
seconds.
The following settings will reset to defaults:
When setting Reference
Function
full auto
page
Backlight
compensation
Off
51
Focus
Exposure
Program AE
White balance
EIS
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
On
71
73
90
91
93
93
MIC.Filter
Off
74
13
Setting Video Flash (for DZ-MV580A)
See “Introduction to Optional Accessories” on page 157.
When recording stills in a dark place,or the subject
is lit from rear, it is recommended that you use the
optional DZ-FLH3 Video Flash*(P. 157): Refer to
the instruction manual of Video Flash for use.
Note:
• However, dark subjects may not be in clear focus even
if the Video Flash is used. It is recommended that you
light a subject when recording in a dark place.
• “ ( ” will blink while the video flash is being charged.
• While “ ( ” is flashing, the video flash will not emit light,
though the DVD camera/recorder is recording.
• Do not use the Video Flash when approaching the
human eye. Emitting light from Video Flash near human
eye could damage the subject’s eyesight. Especially
when recording a baby or small child, move the DVD
video camera/recorder at least 1 m away.
Setting of
On-screen
Manner of
Video Flash information
emitting light
AUTO
No display
Automatically
emits light in dark
place or in a place
lit from rear.
ON
Always emits light
regardless of
brightness
• Do not use the Video Flash while pointing it at a driver in
vehicle: Doing so could dazzle the driver, causing an
accident.
• Do not use the Video Flash in a place where there is
flammableorexplosivegas:Doingsocouldcausefireor
explosion.
OFF
No light emission
* Unusable on DZ-MV550A.
75
USING EXTERNAL MICROPHONE
Connect external microphone (generally available) to the external microphone jack of this DVD video
camera/ recorder. Clearer sound can be recorded. Turn on the switch on external microphone and start
recording. For details on external microphone, see “Major Specifications” on page 182.
To external
microphone jack
A/V
Note:
• Depending on the shape of its plug, an external microphone cannot be plugged in, while the cable is left plugged in
the AV/S input/output terminal. Unplug the AV/S input/output cable to use the external microphone.
• This DVD video camera/recorder cannot use a plug-in power type microphone (power supplied from camcorder).
76
123
Viewing on TV Screen
CONNECTING TO A TV
Use the provided AV/ S input/ output cable to connect the DVD video camera/ recorder to a TV as
follows:
To S-video
input jack*
A/V
To video/
audio input
To AV input/output jack
MIC
jacks
White
AV/S input/output cable
(provided)
Yellow
Red
*If your TV has an S-VIDEO input jack, you can connect the S-VIDEO plug to it.
Note:
• Using S-VIDEO will deliver clearer playback status.
• Before connecting, make sure that the volume on TV is
turned down: Forgetting this may cause howling (see
“Terminology”, P. 160) from the TV speakers.
• Insert the AV/S input/output cable plugs into jacks
straight: Obliquely inserting them could damage the
jacks.
Stereo Type with
S-VIDEO Jack
Stereo Type
Monaural Type
S-VIDEO
AUDIO VIDEO
L
AUDIO VIDEO
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
R
R
White
Yellow
Red
Yellow
White
Red
White
77
123
VIEWING ON TV SCREEN
1
Turn the TV on and set the input selector to
“VCR” whichever applicable Video input.
Note:
• Adjust the volume of sound on TV.
• Theinfraredremotecontrolisusefulwhenoperatingthe
DVD video camera/recorder while viewing an image on
TV screen. However, if you use a Hitachi VCR, the
remote control may inadvertently operate the VCR if it is
near the DVD video camera/recorder. To prevent this,
set the remote control code of the VCR to a position
other than “VCR2”.
Refer to the TV instruction manual for how to
switch the TV input.
2
Turn the DVD video camera/ recorder on.
The image that the DVD video camera/
recorder is seeing will appear on the TV screen.
You can also monitor the image on the LCD
screen or viewfinder ofthe DVD video camera/
recorder.
• Information that the DVD video camera/recorder is
recording will appear on the TV screen: You can also
display only part of information or switch off the display.
Refer to “Setting On-Screen Display Output On or Off
(OSD Output)” on page 100, and press the DISPLAY
button to switch the display status.
• When copy-guarded disc is played back, no image will
appear on TV screen.
3
Perform playback, recording or editing.
• If you use TV with wide mode (aspect ratio 16:9) and set
the TV to the wide mode, the entire Disc Navigation
display may not be displayed on the TV screen. If this
happens, release the wide mode setting on TV (see the
TV instruction manual for releasing the wide mode).
You can perform playback,editing or editing on
Disc Navigation while checking on TV screen.
78
12
Playback on DVD Video Recorder/Player
PLAYING BACK DVD-RAM DISC
You can use a DVD videorecorder(see “Terminology”, P. 160) or DVD player that conforms to DVD-RAM
to play back 8 cm DVD-RAM discs recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder.
1
2
Remove the disc from Round DVD Holder.
Note:
• When playing back disc on another device, the Disc
Navigation display will be different from the one on this
DVD video camera/recorder.
Insert the disc into the DVD video recorder/
player and play it back.
See the instruction manual for DVD video
recorder/ player.
79
PLAYING BACK DVD-R DISC
1
Finalize a recorded DVD-R disc.
3
Insert the disc into the DVD player and play it
back.
You need to finalize a disc to play it back on
DVD player: See page 137.
See the instruction manual for DVD player.
No further data can be recorded on finalized
disc.
Note:
• Do not insert a DVD-R disc that has not been finalized
into a DVD video recorder: The recorded image data
may be damaged.
Note:
Use this DVD video camera/recorder to finalize the
DVD-R disc recorded on the DVD video camera/
recorder.
• See “Terminology” , P. 29, 160 for liner PCM recording.
• DVD-R discs recorded on this DVD video camera/
recorder or other 8 cm DVD-R discs can be played back
on other DVD players or other devices conforming to 8
cm DVD-R, but playback on all DVD players is not
guaranteed.
• Playback may not be possible on some DVD players, or
itmay depend on the recordedstatus of DVD-R discs:In
suchcases, playbacktheDVD-RdisconthisDVDvideo
camera/recorder.
2
Remove the disc from Round DVD Holder.
See “Removing and Replacing from/ in Round
DVD Holder” on page 81.
80
Removing and Replacing from/in Round DVD
Holder
You can remove DVD-RAM or DVD-R disc used on this DVD video camera/ recorder from Round DVD
Holder and use the uncovered disc on DVD player, DVD video recorder, or drive for PC, etc. which
conforms to 8 cm DVD-R. Removing disc from Round DVD Holder may vary with the disc maker: See
the disc instruction sheet. The following explains the disc in Round DVD Holder made by Hitachi
Maxell.
It is recommended that you do not remove the disc from Round DVD Holder until camera recording is
finished, in order to avoid getting dirt on disc.
Note:
Using discs removed from holders on various devices may not always be possible.
HOW TO REMOVE DISC
1
Hold the Round DVD
Holder with SIDE A
facing up.Whilepushing
the two release levers in
the direction of arrows
(1) marked on holder,
slowly open SIDE A of
the holder in the
Release
levers
2
Without touching the
recording/ playback
surface,hold the discedge
and center hole to remove
it.
1
1
SIDE A mark
direction of arrows (2),
taking care not to drop
the disc.
2
2
Do not open
more than 90°.
81
12
REPLACING DISC IN ROUND DVD HOLDER
1
Open SIDE A of the Round DVD Holder, and
replace the disc in the holder with the SIDE A
mark or label surface facing up, taking care not
to touch the disc surface.
2
Close SIDE A of the Round DVD Holder, and
push it to lock the release levers at positions (3).
3
OPEN marks
SIDE A
mark
SIDEAmarksideor
Label surface
3
12
WHEN THE HINGE OF ROUND DVD HOLDER COMES OFF
1
Push the hinged portion of the holder piece
marked SIDE A with thumb and middle finger,
and warp it in the direction of arrows (4).
2
Fit the hinged portion of the other holder piece
into the warped hinge portion.
Note:
• Handle the disc carefully so that no scratch, dirt,
fingerprint or dust adheres to the recording/playback
surface.
SIDE A mark side
Hinged portions
4
• When not using the Round DVD Holder, store it in case:
Do not leave a bare holder as is.
• Be careful of drop or impact: If you drop the Round DVD
Holder, the disc may pop out.
• Do not subject the Round DVD Holder to force.
Approx. 90°
12
DISC CLEANING
Use a soft, dry cloth to lightly wipe off any dust,
dirt, etc. adhering to disc, as shown in the figure.
Never use solvent. Do not use thinner, water, anti-
static spray, etc. to clean disc.
Use soft cloth to clean
from inner to outer
circumference in axial
direction.
82
123
Recording (Dubbing) Images
• Before connecting this DVD video camera/recorder to another device, be
sure to turn both devices off.
Before You Begin
• Insertarecordablediscorcard*inthisDVDvideocamera/recorder(seeP.25,
28).
*
Only photos can be recorded: No video can be recorded.
RECORDING (DUBBING) IMAGES FROM OTHER VIDEO DEVICE
You can record (dub)images from other video devices to discor card in this DVD video camera/ recorder.
Use the AV/ S input/ output cable (provided) to connect the DVD video camera/ recorder to the other
video device as follows:
Signal flow
A/V
To S-VIDEO
output jack of
VCR, etc.*
To video/
audio output
jacks
MIC
To AV input/output jack
Yellow
White
AV/S input/output cable
(provided)
Red
*
If you are using DZ-MV580A and the connected AV device has an S-VIDEO output jack,
you can connect the S-VIDEO jack of AV/S input/output cable.
1
2
Set the input source on
the DVD video camera/
recorder to “LINE (L
IN)”.
3
Press the REC button.
L
IN
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM3
0
MIN
Recording will start on this DVD video
camera/ recorder.
The operation of this line-input recording is the
same as for recording movie.
8
:
0
0
AM
FINE
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
Switch the input
referring to “Input
Source” on page 98.
Choose “S LINE” to input S-VIDEO signal.
(Only for DZ-MV580A)
Turn on the connected device, and start
playback.
The picture will appear on the LCD screen or
viewfinder of this DVD video camera/
recorder.
83
Note:
• If you operate the DVD video camera/recorder
connected to another device, always power the camera/
recorder from AC outlet using the AC adapter/charger.
• IfyouuseaHitachiVCR,itwillbeoperatedbytheremote
control provided with the DVD video camera/recorder.
When recording an image from a Hitachi VCR, change
the remote control code of the VCR to other than
“VCR2”.
• With DZ-MV580A, using S-VIDEO will enable you to
record clearer images.
• The DZ-MV550A cannot record S-VIDEO input.
• Reduce the volume of external input sound heard from
the built-in speaker: The loud volume may cause noise
to enter the recorded image.
• The recorded contents can be played back in the same
manner as when playing back camera images recorded
on this DVD video camera/recorder.
• Still images can also be recorded on DVD-RAM disc or
card. See “Switching External Input Recording Method
(PHOTO Input)” on page 98 for details, and “Recording
Stills” on page 50 for how to record still images.
• The “Input Source” setting will return to “CAMERA”
whenever DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
• Recording of most images is prohibited by the copy-
guard signal to protect the copyright, except for images
recorded on camcorders for personal enjoyment.
“COPY PROTECTED” appears in these images: They
cannot be recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder.
Typical copyright protected images include those of
DVD video, LD, recorded video tapes, some parts of
digital satellite broadcasts, etc.
• If a video signal that cannot be read by this DVD video
camera/recorder is present - even in images recorded
on camcorder for personal enjoyment without copy-
guard signal - the input image may not be recorded
normally.
• If the input signal is interrupted by switching the channel
on TV or switching the signal using video selector (see
“Terminology”, P. 160), normal recording cannot be
performed.
84
RECORDING (DUBBING) IMAGES FROM OTHER VIDEO CAMERAS
You can record (dub)images from other video cameras on a discor card*in DVD video camera/ recorder.
Use the AV/ S input/ output cable (provided) to connect the DVD video camera/ recorder to the other
video camera.
*
Only photos can be recorded: No video can be recorded.
*1
Signal flow
A/V
MIC
3 relay adapters
(generally available)
To AV input/
output jack
AV/S input/output cable (provided)
DVD video camera, 8mm
video camera, VHS video
camera, etc.
ToS-VIDEOoutputjackof
*2
video camera, etc.
*1: The AV/S input/output cable provided with this DVD video camera/recorder can be directly connected to some
video cameras.
*2: If the video camera to be connected has an S video output jack, you can connect it to the DVD video camera/
recorder (DZ-MV580A only).
1
Set the input source on
the DVD video camera/
recorder to “LINE (L
IN)”.
Note:
L
IN
• With DZ-MV580A, using S-VIDEO will enable you to
record clearer images.
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM3
0
MIN
• Reduce the volume of external input sound heard from
the built-in speaker: The loud volume may cause noise
to enter the recorded image.
• Still images can also be recorded on DVD-RAM disc or
card. See “Switching External Input Recording Method
(PHOTO Input)” on page 98 for details, and “Recording
Stills” on page 50 for how to record still images.
8
:
0
0
AM
FINE
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
Switch the input
referring to “Input
Source” on page 98.
Choose “S LINE” to input S-VIDEO signal.
(Only for DZ-MV580A)
2
3
Turn on the connected device, and start
playback.
The picture will appear on the LCD screen or
viewfinder of this DVD video camera/
recorder.
Press the REC button.
Recording will start on this DVD video
camera/ recorder.
The operation of this line-input recording is the
same as for recording movie.
85
RECORDING (DUBBING) IMAGES ON OTHER VIDEO DEVICES
You can record (dub) images played back on this DVD video camera/ recorder, on other video devices.
Use the AV/ S input/ output cable (provided) to connect the DVD video camera/ recorder to another
video device as shown in the following figure:
Signal flow
To S-VIDEO
input jack of
VCR, etc.*
To video/
audio input
jacks
A/V
MIC
To AV input/output jack
Yellow
White
AV/S input/output
cable (provided)
Red
*
If the video device to be connected has an S video input jack, you can connect it to the DVD video camera/
recorder.
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Note:
• Using an S-video jack will deliver clearer images.
• Audio is heard from the speaker: If the volume is too
high, noise may enter the dubbed image.
• It is recommended that you use Disc Navigation to
create a play list including the scenes to be dubbed
among the scenes recorded on this DVD video camera/
recorder (P.126).
Select a scene to be played back.
Press the playback (A) button on this DVD
video camera/ recorder and the record button
on connected device: The DVD video camera/
recorder will start playback and the recorded
device will record (dub) it.
• BesuretousetheACadapter/chargertopowertheDVD
video camera/recorder from AC outlet, to prevent
battery power from shutting off during recording on
another video device.
• If you are using a Hitachi VCR, using the remote control
provided with this DVD video camera/recorder may
operate the VCR. To record (dub) images from the DVD
video camera/recorder to Hitachi VCR, change the
remote control code of VCR to a position other than
“VCR2”.
86
Advanced Techniques
This section explains about various settings to further extend the usefulness of this DVD video camera/
recorder.
Checking Flow of Normal Display Mode
The following two on-screen menu modes are available with this DVD video camera/recorder:
• Quick mode: To display only the fundamental menu items for first timers (P.63)
• Advanced mode: To display all menu items for experts
Camera Functions
Press the MENU button while the camera image is being displayed on the LCD monitor, with the QUICK
MODE switch set to
OFF: The menu of Advanced mode will appear.
Tilt the joystick up, down, to left or right to select a menu item, and then press the A button to choose
the option.
See page 88 for the setting method.
The screens used here to explain are displayed when DVD-RAM discis used. Some items will not appear
when a DVD-R disc or card is used, or when no disc is inserted.
No menu appears during recording.
<Menu screen for setting>
Display of selected
setup item
Camer a F u nc t i on s S e t u p
Auto
Spo r t s
P r og r a
h i t e Ba l .
E I S
D i g . Zoo
M IC . F i l t e r
1 6 : 9
m
AE
W
Po r t r a i t
Spo t l i gh t
Sand&Snow
Low L i gh t
RAM
Options settable
Selection of setup items
S : Camera
m
Functions Setup
T : Record Functions
Setup
Display of disc or card
being used (P. 52)
ENTER
RETURN
U
: Date Setup
V : LCD Setup
: Initial Setup
W
Guide display
Functions settable
87
●Flow of Normal Display Mode
Refer to page indicated for details of each function.
Camera Functions Setup
Date Setup
Ca
m
e r a Fun c t
P r og r a
i
ons Se
t
t
t
up
o
o
Da t e Se t up
m
AE
:
:
:
:
:
:
Au
Au
On
W
E
h i t e Ba l .
I
S
Da
Da
t
t
e
e
Mod e
Se t
:
M/D / Y
D i g . Zoom
4 0 x
M IC . F
1 6 : 9
i
l
t e r
O f
O f
f
f
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Program AE (P. 90)
White balance (P. 91)
EIS*1 (P. 93)
Display format (P. 38)
Date setting (P. 37)
Digital zoom (P. 56)
Microphone filter*2 (P. 93)
16:9*3 (P. 94)
LCD Setup
LCD S e t u p
*1: Displayed on DZ-MV580A only in “ O VIDEO”
status.
*2: Displayed only in “ O VIDEO” status.
*3: Not displayed on DZ-MV550A. Displayed on DZ-
MV580A only for movies using DVD-RAM disc.
B
Co
r
i
l
gh
t
n
e
s
s
or L e v e l
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Brightness (P. 101)
Color density (P. 101)
Recording Functions Setup
Rec o r d F u n c t
i
o n s Se
t
up
V I DEO Mode
npu S o u r c e
OSD Ou pu
:
:
:
F
I NE
Initial Setup
I
t
CAMERA
On
t
t
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
Se up
t
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Beep
Po er Save
:
:
:
:
:
O
O f
On
Eng
A u t o
n
f
w
Re c o r d LED
L a ng u age
Movie quality*4 (P. 96)
l
i
s
h
De
m
o
Mode
Reset
Input selection (P. 98)
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
External still input*5 (P. 98)
Self-timer*6 (P. 99)
Beep (P. 102)
On-screen information display output*7 (P. 100)
Power save (P. 102)
Recording LED (P. 103)
Language selection (P. 103)
Demo mode (P. 159)
Reset (P. 104)
*4 Not displayed with DVD-RAM disc in “ N PHOTO”
status. The quality mode is displayed in “ P
PHOTO” status. (P.97)
*5: Displayed in “ N PHOTO” or “ P PHOTO” status
using DVD-RAM disc, and input selection is set to
external signal or S external signal.
*6: Displayed with DVD-RAM disc in “ N PHOTO”
status, or “ P PHOTO” status.
*7: Displayed only when input selection is set to
camera.
88
You can use the joystick on DVD video camera/ recorder to select various setting options in menu and
designate them.
Press the MENU button.
Tilt to right Press A
Ca
m
e r a Fun c t
P r og r a
i
ons Se
t
t
t
up
o
o
Camer a F u nc
P r og r a
t
i
on s S e t u p
Au
Au
On
or
m
AE
h i t e Ba l .
:
:
:
:
:
:
m
AE
Auto
Spo r t s
W
E
W
E
h i t e Ba l .
I
S
I
S
Po r
Spo
t
t
r
l
a
i
i
t
D i g . Zoom
4 0 x
D i g . Zoom
gh t
M IC . F
1 6 : 9
i
l
t e r
O f
O f
f
f
M IC . F
1 6 : 9
i
l
t e r
Sand&Snow
Low
L
i
gh t
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Tilt to left
or
Tilt down
Tilt up
Rec o r d F u n c t
i
o n s Se
t
up
Press the A button directly to choose an option from menu.
To return to the screen one before, press the C button.
Pressing the MENU button again will cause the advanced mode
menu display to disappear.
V I DEO Mode
npu S o u r c e
OSD Ou pu
:
:
:
F
I NE
I
t
CAMERA
On
t
t
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Note:
• Pressing the MENU button during recording will not work.
• The menu screen will disappear when it is left for approx. one minute without any operation.
• With DZ-MV580A, if the MENU button is pressed with a still image displayed, the size of image will change. Pressing
the MENU or C button will restore the original screen.
89
123
Setting Up Camera Functions
• See page 89 for how to set.
Before You Begin
• No menu screen appears with external input.
SELECTING SHOOTING MODE TO MATCH THE SUBJECT
(SWITCHING PROGRAM AE MODE)
This DVD video camera/ recorder automatically
detects the status of subject and surrounding
situation and records the optimum image: If you
choose the shooting mode to match the recording
conditions, clearer images will be recorded.
1
Press the MENU button, use the joystick to
choose “Program AE” on the “Camera
Functions Setup” screen, and then press the
A button.
The options will appear on the right of
“Program AE”.
Tilt up/down and to left/
right to select, and then
press A to designate.
a Auto : The camera/ recorder automatically
judges the subject and surrounding environment
for optimum recording.
Sports : Reduces blurring when recording
rapidly moving subjects such as in golf or tennis.
If the Sports mode is used under a fluorescent
light, the image may flicker: In this case, use the
Auto mode for recording.
2
Use the joystick to
Camer a F u nc
P r og r a
t
i
on s S e t u p
choose the desired
option, and then press
the A button: The
selected option will be
set.
m
AE
Auto
Spo r t s
W
E
h i t e Ba l .
I
S
Po r
Spo
t
t
r
l
a
i
i
t
D i g . Zoo
m
t e r
gh t
M IC . F
1 6 : 9
i
l
Sand&Snow
Low
L
i
gh t
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Selected AE mode
Portrait : Makes a subject, such as a person or
a creature, stand out from a blurred background.
Spotlight : Prevents overexposure of subject
portrait face, etc. when strong light strikes the
subject, as in a wedding or on stage.
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM3
0
MIN
8
:
0
0
AM
FINE
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
Sand & Snow : Prevents underexposure of
subject portrait face,etc.in a place where reflection
of light is intense, such as at the seaside in
midsummer or on a ski slope.
3
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
The menu screen will disappear.
LowLight:Allows user to record in a dark place
even with decreased lighting: However, an after-
image will appear with a moving subject.
Note that the Low Light mode cannot be used
when the recording quality mode is STD.
If there is difficulty in automatically focusing
subject image, adjust the focus manually. (P.71)
Note:
• You can check the selected AE mode by the on-screen
information display. However, nothing will appear in the
Auto mode.
• The shooting mode set as above will be stored in
memory even if the DVD video camera/recorder is
turned off.
90
ADJUSTING COLOR (WHITE BALANCE)
This DVD video camera/ recorder automatically
adjusts the color of subject. Change the white
balance setting depending on the recording
conditions.
Note:
• The white balance mode can be confirmed using the on-
screen information.
• The whitebalancesetting will be storedin memoryeven
when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
• Do not block the infrared sensor (see “Terminology”, P.
160) with hand, etc.
On-screen
Mode
Auto
Setting content
display
White balance always
automatically adjusted
None
Set
You can manually adjust
white balance to match
the light source or
h
i
situation (P.92)
Outdoor
Indoor 1
To record in fine weather
Infrared sensor block
To record under
incandescent light,
halogen light or bulb-
color type fluorescent
light
• If a tele or wide-conversion lens is used, the auto white
balance may not operate depending on the recording
conditions. If this happens, set to the mode to match the
recording conditions, or manually set the white balance.
• Be sure to remove the lens cap before turning the DVD
video camera/recorder on: If the DVD video camera/
recorder is turned on with the lens capped, the white
balance will not work normally.
j
k
Indoor 2
To record under
fluorescent light
1
Press the MENU button,
Camer a F u nc
P r og r a
t
i
on s S e t u p
AE
h i t e Ba l .
choose “White Bal.” on
the “Camera Functions
Setup” menu screen,and
then press the A
button.
m
W
E
Au t
Set
o
I
S
g
D i
M IC .
1 6 : 9
.
Zoo
l
m
t e r
Ou t do o r
I ndoor
I ndoor
F
i
1
2
RAM
ENTER
RETURN
2
Choose the desired
option, and then press
the A button.
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM3
0
MIN
8
:
0
0
AM
FINE
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
White balance mode
3
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
91
●Setting white balance manually
1
Point the DVD
video camera/
recorder at a white
object so that it fills
the screen. Use an
object that is not
transparent.
Iffocusisnot correct
when the white
Thick paper
object fills the screen,manually focus the object,
referring to “Manually Focusing Subject” (see
page 71).
2
3
Press the MENU button,
Camer a F u nc
t
i
on s S e t u p
AE
h i t e Ba l .
choose “White Bal.”,
“Set”, and then press the
A button.
P r og r a
m
W
E
D i
Au t
Set
o
I
S
g
.
Zoo
m
t e r
Ou t do o r
I ndoor
I ndoor
M IC .
1 6 : 9
F
i
l
1
2
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Hold A pressed until
the “h” indicator
changes from blinking to
a steady light. When the
“h” indicator lights, the
white balance setting
will be complete.
Set
EXIT
RAM
4
Press the Cbutton to end
the setting.
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM3
0
MIN
8
:
0
0
AM
FINE
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
Note:
• The white balance set using the “Set” option will be
storedin memoryuntil itis re-set. Re-setting willchange
the “h” indicator from blinking to a steady light.
• Do not use a colored object when setting the white
balance: The appropriate tint cannot be set.
• If “Input Source: LINE” has been specified, you cannot
use the “Set” mode of white balance (P. 98).
• The setting on white balance “Set” may not be possible
in a dark place. Also, the white balance cannot be set
when the zoom bar is in the digital zoom range (P. 56).
Insuchstatus,the“h”indicatorwillremainblinking.Set
the white balance in a bright place with “Dig. Zoom Off”
specified.
• If the recording conditions have changed, re-set the
white balance for appropriate colors.
92
USING THE ELECTRONIC IMAGE STABILIZER (EIS)
When you use zoom to record a magnified subject image, it will correct fuzziness in the recorded image.
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “EIS” on the
“Camera Functions
Setup” menu screen,and
then press the A
button.
After recording with EIS set to “Off”, it is
Ca
m
e r a F u nc
t
i
on s Se t u p
AE
h i t e Ba l .
recommended that you return the setting to “On”
and then turn the DVD video camera/ recorder off,
unless you normally record with “Off” setting.
P r og r a
m
W
E
D i
I
S
g
On
Of
.
Z
F
o om
t e r
f
M IC .
1 6 : 9
i
l
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Note:
• The EIS setting will be stored in memory even when the
DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
• Itisrecommendedthatyouspecify“EISOff”whenusing
the DVD video camera/recorder on a desk or tripod.
• When “EIS On” is specified, there will be a slight
difference between the actual movement and the
movement on screen.
2
3
Choose the “On” or “Off”, and then press the
A button.
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
• Grosscamerashakemay notbeentirelycorrectedeven
if “EIS ON” is specified: Firmly hold the DVD video
camera/recorder with both hands.
• EIS may not operate correctly when the tele or wide-
conversion lens (generally available) is used.
• EIS cannot be used when recording stills on DZ-
MV580A.
●Checking EIS On or Off
You can check EIS On or Off by the on-screen
information display.
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM3
0
MIN
EIS
8
:
0
0
AM
FINE
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
REDUCING WIND NOISE DURING RECORDING (MIC.FILTER)
When recording sound from the microphone built into this DVD video camera/ recorder,you can reduce
wind noise in recording.
If “MIC.Filter: ON” is specified, the low-frequency components in the sound picked up by microphone
will be cut off during recording: This makes it easier to hear the target voice or sound during playback.
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “MIC.Filter” on
the “Camera Functions
Setup” menu screen,and
then press the A
button.
3
Press the MENU button
to end the setting.
Camer a F u nc
t
i
on s S e t u p
AE
h i t e Ba l .
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
P r og r a
m
REM3
0
MIN
W
E
I
S
D i g . Zoo
m
t e r
M IC . F
1 6 : 9
i
l
On
8
:
0
0
AM
FINE
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Microphone filter icon
2
Choose the desired option, and then press the
A button.
Note:
• You can also use the on-screen display to confirm that
the MIC.Filter has been set.
• The MIC.Filter setting will be stored in memory even
when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
• The MIC.Filter function will work only during movie
recording.
• The microphone filter function works only with the built-
inmicrophone:Itwillnotfunctionwhenusinganexternal
microphone (P. 76).
93
1
SETTING TO WIDE TV SCREEN MODE (16:9 MODE)
If you view the images recorded with “16:9 On” specified on a wide-screen TV (aspect ratio 16:9), screen
image will be wider than the images recorded with “16:9 Off” (aspect ratio 4:3) by the size of the areas
on left and right (in dotted lines).
“16:9 Off” specified
(aspect ratio 4:3)
“16:9 On” specified
(aspect ratio 16:9)
1
Press the MENU button, choose “16:9” on the
“Camera Setup Functions” menu screen, and
then press the A button.
2
Choose “On”, and then press the A button.
3
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
C a
m
e
r
a
r
h
I
i
I
F
g
t
u
r
e
n
a
c
m
B a
t
i
o
n s S e
t
u
p
P
W
E
D
M
1
o
i
S
A E
l
0
:
0
0
0
:
0
0
.
REM3
MIN
g.
C.
9
Z
F
o
i
o
l
m
t
e
r
O n
O
8
:
0
0
AM
FINE
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
6
:
f
f
EN T ER
RE T URN
RA
M
16:9 mode icon
When viewing playback on an ordinary TV screen later, specify “16:9 Off”: Recording with “16:9 On”
specified will be played back on an ordinary TV with longer vertical direction of image.
An image recorded with “16:9 On” specified will appear as follows:
Display in viewfinder
Display on LCD monitor screen
94
Note:
• The 16:9 setting will be kept even after the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
• The DZ-MV550A does not have the 16:9 setting.
• The 16:9 setting can be used when recording movies on DVD-RAM disc: It is not compatible with still recording,
recording of external input or recording on DVD-R disc.
• Images recorded with “16:9 On” (aspectratio16:9)specifiedwillbeplayedbackwith the setting used during recording
regardless of the 16:9 setting then being used.
• The characters of dates and titles will be longer in the vertical direction on a wide-screen TV and on the LCD monitor
of this DVD video camera/recorder.
• When“16:9On”isspecified,blackbandswillappearacrossthetopandbottomofLCDmonitorscreen(exceptonmenu
screen, Navigation screen, or playback image recorded with “16:9 Off” specified).
• The 16:9 setting is not compatible with ID-1/ID-2*.
• Toviewimagesrecordedat16:9setting,switchtheaspectratioofyourTV:SeeTVinstructionmanualforthisswitching.
• When using a video selector (see “Terminology”, P. 160), the TV may not automatically be switched to 16:9 mode.
*
This system records the aspect ratio (16:9, 4:3) information in void space between video signals.
95
Setting Up Record Functions
12
SWITCHING MOVIE QUALITY (VIDEO MODE)
Choose the movie quality from “XTRA” (only with DVD-RAM disc), “FINE”, “STD” and “LPCM” (only
with DVD-R disc).
It is recommended that you record criticalsubjects in the “XTRA” or “FINE” when you are using a DVD-
RAM disc, or in the “FINE” with a DVD-R disc. (P.29)
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “VIDEO Mode”
on the “Record
Functions Setup” menu
screen, and then press
the A button.
Note:
Re c o r d F u nc
t
i
on s S e t u p
• The movie quality setting will be stored in memory even
when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
• The “VIDEO Mode” setting will not change even if the
DVD-RAM disc is replaced with a DVD-R disc, or vice
versa. However, the setting will switch to “FINE” in the
following cases:
V
I
DEO Mode
XTRA
F I NE
STD
I n p u t Sou r ce
OSD Ou t p u t
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
- Whenthemodeissetto“XTRA”withaDVD-RAMdisc
inserted and then the disc is replaced with a DVD-R
disc
2
3
Choose the desired quality mode, and then
press the A button.
- When the mode is set to “LPCM” with a DVD-R disc
inserted andthediscisreplacedwithaDVD-RAMdisc
• When using DVD-R disc, you cannot switch the movie
quality while recording on the disc: The DVD video
camera/recorder will be automatically set to the movie
quality first used with the disc for recording.
• The movie quality setting is effective only during movie
recording: The setting will not be displayed during
recording of stills.
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM3
0
MIN
8
:
0
0
AM
FINE
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
Movie quality
96
Block-like noise may appear in recorded image, or the outline of subject image is distored under the
recording conditions listed below: Pan the DVD video camera/ recorder as slowly as possible. (Block
noise is likely to appear in the “STD”):
• If there is a complicated pattern in background (as in following figure on left)
• If the DVD video camera/ recorder is moved excessively or quickly
• If subject is moving rapidly even when the DVD video camera/ recorder is not moving
(Image when block-like noise occurs)
(Image without block-like noise)
3
SWITCHING QUALITY OF STILL IMAGE (QUALITY)
You can switch the still recording quality only when using card.
It is recommended that you use “FINE” when recording vital images. (P. 30 “SIZE AND QUALITY
OF PHOTOS”)
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “Quality” on the
“Record Functions
Setup” menu screen,and
then press the A
button.
3
Pressthe MENU button
to end the setting.
Re c o r d F u nc
t
i
on s S e t u p
REM
9
9
9
Q
u
a
l
i
t
y
FINE
NORM
ECO
I n p u t Sou r ce
Se T i mer
OSD Ou t p u t
l
f
8
:
0
0
AM
NORM
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
ENTER
RETURN
Still recording quality
2
Choose the option you want, and then press the
A button.
Note:
Thestillqualitysettingwillbestoredinmemoryevenwhen
the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
97
123
RECEIVING IMAGE FROM ANOTHER DEVICE (INPUT SOURCE)
If you wish to input an image from another device to this DVD video camera/ recorder, you must first
switch the setting on the DVD video camera/ recorder.
Refer to the explanation starting from page 83 on how to connect the DVD video camera/ recorder to
other devices or record images input from them.
Setting
CAMERA
LINE
Content
On-screen display
Usually select this option.
No display
L IN
To input image from another device
S LINE*
To input S-VIDEO signal from another device
S IN
* Displayed on DZ-MV580A only.
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “Input Source”
on the “Record
Functions Setup” menu
screen, and then press
the A button.
3
Press the MENU button
to end the setting.
Re c o r d F u nc
t
i
on s S e t u p
L
9
IN
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM3
0
MIN
V
I
DEO Mode
I n p u t Sou r ce
OSD Ou t p u t
CAMERA
L
I
NE
L I NE
Note:
S
8
:
0
0
AM
The “Input Source” setting will
return to “CAMERA” whenever
theDVDvideocamera/recorder
is turned off.
FINE
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
External input icon
2
Choose “LINE”, and then press the A button.
13
SWITCHING EXTERNAL INPUT RECORDING METHOD (PHOTO INPUT)
When “Input Source: LINE or S LINE” is specified, you can record stills of externally input images on
either a DVD-RAM disc or a card. The DVD video camera/ recorder can record an external image with
little movement by specifying “Frame”, but “Field” is recommended for recording image with
movement.
Recording
format
Details of setting
On-screen display
Doesnotsuitrecordingoffrequentlymovingvideosubjects,despitehigh
image quality. Frame suits recording of less moving video.
Frame
C
C
Suitable for recording of frequently moving video subjects.
Field
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “PHOTO Input”
on the “Record
Functions Setup” menu
screen, and then press
the A button.
Re c o r d F u nc
I n p u t Sou r ce
PHOTO I n p u t
t
i
on s S e t u p
L
IN
REM
Still external input icon
9
0
9
9
F
F
r
i
ame
Se
l
f
T i mer
e
l
d
8
:
0
AM
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
2
3
Select the desired option and then press theA
button.
Note:
• The PHOTO Input setting can be confirmed using the
on-screen information.
• The PHOTO Input setting will be stored in memory even
when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
• Referto“Recording(Dubbing)Images”,P.83toseehow
to connect the DVD video camera/recorder to another
device.
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
98
13
SELF-TIMER
You can record photos using the self-timer function, as with ordinary cameras.
The self-timer function is valid only when recording photos (stills).
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “Self Timer” on
the “Record Functions
Setup” menu screen,and
then press the A
button.
4
Press the REC button.
Re c o r d F u nc
t
i
on s S e t u p
I n p u t Sou r ce
Se T i mer
OSD Ou t p u t
The recording indicator at the front of DVD
video camera/ recorder will blink.
The self-timer indicator will start to count
down, and recording will commence
approximately 10 seconds later.
l
f
On
Of f
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
2
3
Select “On”, and then press the A button.
The self-timer will be set.
Note:
• You can also check that self-timer has been set by
reviewing the on-screen information.
• To release the self-timer mode, choose “Off” on the
menu screen or turn DVD video camera/recorder off.
• To suspend self-timer, press the REC button again
before recording starts, or press the C button.
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
1
0
REM
9
9
9
Self-timerrecording
8
:
0
0
AM
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
99
123
SETTING ON-SCREEN DISPLAY OUTPUT ON OR OFF (OSD OUTPUT)
If you connect this DVD video camera/ recorder to a TV to view images on TV screen, you can switch
off the on-screen information (displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen) from the TV screen.
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “OSD output” on
the “Record Functions
Setup” menu screen,and
then press the A
button.
3
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
Re c o r d F u nc
t
i
on s S e t u p
V
I
DEO Mode
Note:
I n p u t Sou r ce
OSD Ou t p u t
On
Of
• The“OSDOutput” settingwill bestored inmemoryeven
when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
• Even if “Off” is chosen, the on-screen information will
appear during playback. See page 62 for playback on-
screen information display.
f
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
2
Choose “On” or “Off”, and press the A
button.
• Even after the on-screen information is removed from
the TV screen, it will still appear in the viewfinder or on
the LCD screen.
• The on-screen display output functions only when the
input selection is set to camera: It cannot be set during
external input.
LCD screen or viewfinder
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM3
0
MIN
8
:
0
0
AM
FINE
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
“Off” setting
“On” setting
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
REM3
0
MIN
8
:
0
0
AM
FINE
9
/
3
0
/
2
0 0
4
TV screen
TV screen
100
123
LCD Setup
SETTING BRIGHTNESS OF LCD SCREEN (BRIGHTNESS)
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “Brightness” on
the “LCD Setup” menu
screen, and then press
the A button.
LCD S e t u p
B r
Co
i
l
gh t n e s s
e v e l
o
r
L
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
The brightness
adjustment bar will appear on the screen.
Tilt up/down and to left/
right to select, and then
press A to designate.
2
Use the joystick for
adjustment.
LCD S e t u p
3
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
B r
Co
i
l
gh t n e s s
e v e l
Tilt to left :The screen
becomes
dimmer
Tilt to right :The screen
becomes
o
r
L
Note:
Thebrightness setting will be stored inmemoryeven after
the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
ADJUST
ENTER
RAM
Brightness
adjustment bar
brighter
SETTING COLOR DENSITY OF LCD SCREEN (COLOR LEVEL)
1
Choose “Color Level”
on the “LCD Setup”
menu screen, and then
press the A button.
3
Press the MENU button.
LCD S e t u p
Note:
B r
Co
i
l
gh t n e s s
e v e l
• The color setting will be stored in memory even after the
DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
• Even if the brightness or density of LCD monitor screen
is changed, the brightness or density of the recorded
image itself will not change.
o
r
L
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
The color density
adjustment bar will
appear on the screen.
2
Use the joystick for
adjustment.
LCD S e t u p
B r
Co
i
l
gh t n e s s
e v e l
Tilt to left :For lighter
color
Tilt to right :For denser
color
o
r
L
ADJUST
ENTER
RAM
Color density
adjustment bar
101
123
Initial Settings
SWITCHING OPERATING SOUND ON OR OFF (BEEP)
Setting
On
Content
Beep is heard when the power switch is changed over, the REC button is pressed,
etc.
No beep is heard.
Off
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “Beep” on the
“Initial Setup” menu
screen, and then press
the A button.
2
3
Select “On” or “Off”, and then press the A
button.
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
e
S e t u p
Be
P o w e r
R e c o r d LED
L a n g u a g e
Demo Mode
Reset
p
On
Of
S
a v e
f
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Note:
The“Beep”settingwillbestoredinmemoryevenwhenthe
DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
TURNING DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER OFF AUTOMATICALLY
(POWER SAVE)
Setting
On
Content
To engage power save. If the DVD video camera/recorder is left in the recording
pause status without being operated for 5 minutes, it will automatically turn off to
prevent the battery from discharging needlessly.
To cancel power save
Off
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “Power Save” on
the “Initial Setup” menu
screen, and then press
the A button.
Note:
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
e
S e t u p
• To turn the DVD video camera/recorder on again from
automatic off activated by the power save function, set
the power switch to “POWER OFF”, and then set it to “O
VIDEO”, “N PHOTO” or “P PHOTO”
Be
P o w e r
R e c o r d LED
L a n g u a g e
Demo Mode
Reset
p
S
a v e
On
Of
f
• The Power Save setting will not appear in the on-screen
information display.
• The Power Save setting will be stored in memory even
when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
2
3
Select “On” or “Off”,
and then press the A button.
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
102
TURNING RECORD LED ON OR OFF (RECORD LED)
You can switch off the recording indicator on the front of DVD video camera/ recorder even during
recording.
Setting
On
Content
TherecordingindicatorwilllightredtoshowthattheDVDvideocamera/recorderisrecording.
The recording indicator will not light even during recording.
Off
2
3
Select “On” or “Off”, and then press the A
button.
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
Recording indicator
Note:
• TheRecordLEDsettingwillnotappearintheon-screen
information display.
• The Record LED setting will be stored in memory even
when the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
• Specify “Record LED: Off” when recording a subject
behind a glass or water tank that reflects light: The
reflected light of the recording indicator will not be
recorded.
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “Record LED” on
the “Initial Setup” menu
screen, and then press
the A button.
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
e
S e t u p
Be
P o w e r
R e c o r d LED
L a n g u a g e
Demo Mode
Reset
p
S
a v e
On
Of
f
• Even if “Record LED Off” is specified, the recording
indicator will light while the self-timer is counting down.
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
CHANGING DISPLAY LANGUAGE (LANGUAGE)
You can change the language used to display the menu and information.
The following shows that English is changed to French.
1
2
Press the MENU button,
choose “Language” on
the “Initial Setup” menu
screen, and then press
the A button.
3
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
e
Se
p
t
up
Be
P o w e r
R e c o r d LED
L an gu age
Demo Mode
Reset
S
a v e
Eng l i sh
ança
Español
Note:
F
r
i
s
The language setting will be stored in memory even when
the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off.
Deu
t
l
sh
ano
RAM
I
t
a
i
ENTER
RETURN
Select “Français”, and
then press the A
button.
Con
f
i
g u r
Be
P o w e r
a
t
i
on
I
n
i
t
i
a
r
l
e
e
p
S
a v e
LED E n r g.
L an gu e
F
ança
i
s
Mode Démo
Régl Défaut
ENTRER
RETOUR
RAM
103
RESETTING MENU SETTINGS TO DEFAULTS (RESET)
You can restore menu settings to defaults (initial settings at the factory (P. 181)). (Note, however, that the
date/ time will not be reset.)
1
Press the MENU button,
choose “Reset” on the
“Initial Setup” menu
screen, and then press
the A button.
3
Press the MENU button to end the setting.
I
n
i
t
i
a
l
e
S e t u p
Be
P o w e r
R e c o r d LED
L a n g u a g e
Demo Mode
Reset
p
S
a v e
Note:
Tocancelresettingmidway,choose“NO”onthescreenfor
verification in step 2 or press the C button.
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
The screen for verifying
reset will appear.
2
If you are sure that you
wish to reset, use the
joystick to choose“YES”,
and then press the A
button.
Re s e t
ENTER
Re s e t
?
YES
NO
RAM
The setting items have
now been reset to defaults.
104
Disc Navigation
123
Using Disc Navigation
STARTING OR TERMINATING DISC NAVIGATION
Disc Navigation is a tool for editing scenes recorded on this DVD video camera/ recorder.
Here is an explanation on “scene” and “program”, so that you will be able to make most use of Disc
Navigation function.
The screens in this instruction manual are basically those that will appear when DVD-RAM disc is used:
Some items will not appear when DVD-R disc or card is used, but the operation is the same.
• Turn the DVD video camera/recorder on (P.48).
• When using disc: Set the power switch to “O VIDEO” or “N PHOTO”.
• When using card: Set the power switch to “P PHOTO”.
Before You Begin
1
Press the DISC
NAVIGATION
button.
The Disc
Navigation screen (shown on page 106) will
appear.
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Disc Navigation will be terminated and the
DVD video camera/ recorder will enter the
recording pause status.
You can also press the C button to end Disc
Navigation.
105
Thumbnail (see “Terminology”, P. 160)
*1
Selected scene number
Number of all scenes
/
Al l Pr og r a
m
s
001 / 014
Cursor
*2
*4
Current page position
Bar graph
Still image icon
*3
*5
Operation guide
Disc type icon
PLAY
RAM
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Scene number refers to display number on thumbnail display screen.
No still icon will appear for card.
The operation guide will vary depending on the operation status of DVD video camera/recorder.
Appears when 13scenes or more have been recorded.
“
R” appears for DVD-R disc. “ ” will appear for card.
Note:
• The background color of screen allows you to identify
whether disc or card is used on this DVD video camera/
recorder.
- Purple: When disc is used.
- Green: When card is used.
• Pressing the DISPLAY button will display the recording
date/time of the scene on which the cursor is placed in
the space for operating guide. Pressing DISPLAY again
will display the operating guide.
• If no disc or card is inserted, the Disc navigation screen
cannot be displayed even by pressing the DISC
NAVIGATION button.
• Each time Disc Navigation is started with a DVD-R disc
inserted, message “Creating Thumbnail ...” will appear.
After the message appears, the Disc Navigation screen
will appear.
• If the following disc or card is inserted, the Disc
Navigation screen will appear or some message will be
displayed:
- Write-protected disc
- Locked card
- Finalized DVD-R disc
• Do not leave the disc navigation screen displayed on TV
to which the DVD video camera/recorder is connected:
Doing so could damage the TV screen, possibly by
burning.
106
PLAYING BACK FROM DISC NAVIGATION SCREEN
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
3
Press the A button.
Use the joystick to select the desired scene.
Playback will start from the selected scene.
Note:
Tilting the joystick to left or right will move the cursor to
the preceding or following scene.
Tilting it up or down will move to preceding or following
page.
The selected scene will be framed: This is called
a “cursor”.
Al
l
Pr og r a
m
s
001 / 014
Al
l
Pr og r a
m
s
007 / 014
Up or Down
Left or Right
A
PLAY
RAM
PLAY
RAM
●When playback ends:
The DVD video camera/
recorder will enter the
playback pause status at the
last image of last scene.
Pressing the C or DISC
NAVIGATION button will
restore the Disc Navigation
screen.
Note:
• Press the A button to temporarily stop playback.
Pressing A again will start from that point.
• If you press the A button after playback of the last
scene ondisc finishes, playback willstartagainfrom the
beginning of disc.
• Pressing the C button will always restore the Disc
Navigation screen.
• Whenplayingbackastillwithalargenumberofpixelson
card, “Playback.” will appear, and it will take some time
for the still to appear.
Playback pause
When the playback pause status continues for as
long as 5 minutes, the Disc Navigation screen will
automatically be restored.
●Playing back stills
A still will be displayed for approx. 3 seconds.
When playing back stills on card, playback will
stop after each still playback.
107
SELECTING MULTIPLE SCENES
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Use the joystick to select the desired scene.
Press the SELECT button once:
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to randomly select
multiple scenes.
To cancel a selected scene, select the scene to be
canceled, and then press the SELECT button.
To cancel all selected scenes, press the C button.
The selected scene will be framed in red and
yellow.
Note:
Although scenes can be randomly selected, playback will
always start from the lowest scene number.
SELECTING CONSECUTIVE SCENES TOGETHER
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Note:
• You can know the status of scenes from the colors of
cursor and bargraph:
Use the joystick to select
Al
l
Pr ogr ams
005 / 014
the desired scene.
Cursor Bar graph
Yellow Light blue
Status of scenes
Current cursor position
Range of scenes being
selected
PLAY
RAM
Blue
Red
Light blue
Red
Scenes already selected
Yellow frame
• Pressing theA buttonafterselectingscenes willplay
back only the selected scenes from the beginning of
each.
• Youcanalsoselectscenesinreversefromthelastscene
in the range.
• To release multiple selection, press the SELECT or C
button after step 4.
• Upto999 scenes canbe selectedfor both disc andcard.
3
4
Hold down the SELECT
button for at least one
second:
Al
l
Pr ogr a
m
s
005 / 014
The selected scene will
be doubly framed in
yellow and blue.
RAM
ENTER
CANCEL
Double frames in
yellow and blue
Use the joystick to select
the last scene in the
range you want, and
then press the A
button:
Al
l
Pr ogr a
m
s
010/ 014
RAM
PLAY
DESELECT ALL
The thumbnails of
Red
frame
scenes in the specified
range will be framed in
red, and then selected.
Whenscenesuptothis
point are selected
108
FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE WITH DISC NAVIGATION
The Disc Navigation mode will allow a variety of further operations.
Reference
page
Available function
Disc or card used
Contents
Deletion of scenes
Editing of scenes
You can delete unnecessary scenes.
111
13
1
You can attach fade and skip to a scene,
combine scenes, or divide one scene.
113 - 117
Scene information
display
Youcandisplayinformationononescene
ormultiplescenes,suchasimagequality,
recording time, etc.
122
123
Changing title
You can change the title of play list or
program.
124, 132
126
1
1
Creation of play list
Disc or Card initialization
You can create an original movie by
changing the combination of scenes.
YoucaninitializeaDVD-RAMdiscorcard
so that it can be used on this DVD video
camera/recorder.
135
13
Copy from disc to card
Disc finalization
You can copy photos recorded on DVD-
RAM disc to card.
118
137
13
2
You can use this DVD video camera/
recorder to finalize any DVD-R disc
recorded on it so that the disc can be
viewed on DVD player, etc.
Repeat play
Slide show
You can repeatedly play back programs
and scenes.
138
12
You can play back stills continuously.
139
134
3
Remaining display
(Capacity)
The remaining recordable movie time or
number of recordable stills is displayed.
123
Disc protection
You can protect the DVD-RAM disc to
prevent deletion or editing by mistake.
134
119
1
Scene lock
You can lock any scene so that it will not
be deleted by mistake: Essential scenes
are thereby protected, and recording
another still is possible.
3
DPOF setting
You can set the number of prints for each
scene.
120
3
Note:
Editing functions (thumbnail, skip, fade) are original to this DVD video camera/recorder. When a disc edited on this DVD
video camera/recorder is directly played back on a DVD-RAM recorder or read into PC, the editing results will not be
reflectedintheplaybackorreading. Toreflecttheeditingresults, connectbothdevicesusingtheAV/Sinput/outputcable
and then perform recording (dubbing (P.86)).
109
UNDERSTANDING FLOW OF DISC NAVIGATION MENU
Press the MENU button on the Disc Navigation screen: The menu screens for Disc Navigation and menu
screens for disc and card will appear.
See pages 87-89 and 106 for how to interpret the screen.
Refer to pages indicated for details of settings.
●When using DVD-RAM disc
Scene
Delete (P.111)
Edit
Copy
Select (P.121)
Detail (P.122)
(P.113)
(P.118)
Thumbnail (P.113)
Skip
Fade
(P.114)
(P.115)
Combine (P.116)
Divide
Move*
(P.117)
(P.114)
Start → Current (P.121)
Current → End (P.121)
All
(P.121)
* Will appear when a play list is displayed.
Play list
Program
Switch (P.127)
Play (P.127)
Create (P.126)
Go To
Disc
Top
End
(P.133)
(P.133)
Edit
Title
(P.128 - 131)
(P.132)
Capacity
Protect Disc
Format Disc
(P.134)
(P.134)
(P.135)
Delete (P.132)
Update Control Info. (P.136)
Switch (P.123)
Play
Title
(P.124)
(P.124)
Others
Category
(P.138)
Repeat Play (P.138)
ETC
●When using DVD-R disc
Scene
Select (P.121)
Detail (P.122)
Start → Current (P.121)
Current → End (P.121)
All
(P.121)
Program
Go To
Switch (P.123)
Disc
Capacity
Finalize Disc (P.137)
(P.134)
Play
(P.124)
Others
ETC
Repeat Play (P.138)
Top
End
(P.133)
(P.133)
●When using card
Scene
Delete (P.111)
Lock (P.119)
DPOF (P.120)
Select (P.121)
Start → Current (P.121)
Detail
(P.122)
Current → End (P.121)
All
(P.121)
Go To
Card
Top
End
(P.133)
(P.133)
Slide Show
All
(P.139)
DPOF (P.139)
Capacity
(P.134)
Format Card (P.135)
110
Scene
13
DELETING SCENES (DELETE)
You may want to delete unwanted scenes.
Scenes on DVD-R disc cannot be deleted, and menu item “Delete” will not appear with DVD-R disc.
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Select the scene to be
7
Press the C button to
quit.
De
l
e
t
e
Sc en e
0 05 / 0 1 3
All Programs
0 05 / 0 1 4
deleted.
ENTER
EX I T
RAM
3
Press the MENU
button.
PLAY
DESELECT ALL
RAM
Note:
• If you point the cursor at the scene to be deleted on “All
Programs” screen, and then press the DELETE button
on remote control, the screen in step 5 will appear.
• To delete an unwanted part of a scene on DVD-RAM
disc, divide the scene first, and then delete the
unnecessary part (See page 117).
• If you delete all data on disc or card, initializing the disc
or card will be recommended (See page 135).
• If the time of deleted scenes (stills) is quite short, the
remainingfreespaceofdiscmaynotincreaseinthedisc
or card remaining indicator.
Scene to be deleted
4
5
Choose “Delete” on the
“Scene” menu screen,
and then press the A
button.
Sc ene
De
Ed
Copy
Se e c t
De t
l
i
e
t
t
e
l
a
i
l
ETC
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
The “Delete Scene”
screen will appear: If
you are sure you want to delete the selected
• Thelockedscenesoncardcannotbedeleted(Seepage
119).
scene, press the A button.
• If even one play list has been created, message “Same
scenes on PlayList will be deleted. Delete scenes?” will
appear before deleting scene(s). This message will
appear even if the scene(s) to be deleted is not used in
the corresponding play list. In this case, choose “YES”
and then press the A button.
If you want to change the scene to be deleted,
you can change it on this screen.
6
The screen for verifying
De
l
e
t
e
Sc en e
/ 30
Scene No. 005
deletion will appear:
Choose “YES”, and then
press the A button.
9
/
2004
8
:
00:00AM
De
l
e
t
e
sc en e?
NO
YES
ENTER
Choose “NO” to cancel
deletion.
After Yes or No setting, the “Delete Scene”
screen will be restored.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to delete other scenes.
111
●Editing using submenu
Press the MENU button before pressing the Abutton in step 5(See page 111):The submenu willappear.
Ed
i
t
Se
l
e c
t
Go To
E x
De
i
l
t
e t e
S
Cu
A
t
a
r
l
r
r
t
–
Cu
–
r
r en t
en t
End
To p
En d
l
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Edit
Exit...................... To restore the Disc Navigation screen
Delete ................. To delete selected scenes
Select
Start→Current... To select scenes from the start to the one that the cursor is on at the
moment
Current→End .... To select scenes from the scene the cursor is on to the end
All ....................... To select all scenes
Go To
Top ...................... To move the cursor to the first scene
End...................... To move the cursor to the last scene
Pressing the C button will restore the screen in step 5.
Note:
Although the submenu screen will appear for each setting, some menu items may not appear, depending on the setting.
112
1
CHANGING IMAGES FOR THUMBNAILS (EDIT - THUMBNAIL)
Normally, the first image of the recorded scene is displayed as a thumbnail: You can choose another
image ofthe scene for thumbnail.Ifyou set a vivid image to thumbnail,you can know what you recorded
from a glance at the Disc Navigation screen.
Original thumbnail
You can use this image as thumbnail.
●
●
●
●
●
●
1
2
3
4
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
7
8
The screen for verifying
switching of thumbnail
will appear: Choose
“YES”, and then press
the A button.
Cha ng e Th u
m
bna
i
l
Select the thumbnail of the scene to be changed.
Press the MENU button.
Cha ng e t h u
YES
m
bna
i
l
?
NO
ENTER
Choose “Scene”, “Edit”,
“Thumbnail”, and then
Choose “NO” to cancel
switching of thumbnail.
After Yes or No setting, the “Change
Thumbnail” screen will be restored.
Sc ene
De
Ed
Copy
Se e c t
De t
l
i
e
t
t
e
T h umbna
Sk
F ad e
Comb
i
l
press the A button.
i
p
l
a
i
l
i
ne
ETC
D i
RETURN
v
i
de
Repeat steps 5-7 to change the other scenes.
ENTER
RAM
Press the C button to quit.
5
The “Change
Select Thumbnail Point
Thumbnail” screen will
appear: If you are sure
you want to change the
thumbnail of the
Note:
• If you press the MENU button before pressing the A
button in step 5, the submenu screen will appear. (See
page 112)
SEL
ENTER
CANCEL
selected scene, press the
Abutton:The selected
scene will be played back.
• A thumbnail of still cannot be changed.
• Since the scene to which skipping is set cannot be
playedback,youwillnotbeabletochangeitsthumbnail:
Release the skip setting of the scene to change the
thumbnail.
If you want to change the scene whose
thumbnail is to be changed, you can change it
on this screen.
6
When the image you want to use as the
thumbnail of the scene appears, press the
SELECT button.
113
1
PLAYING BACK BY SKIPPING SCENES (EDIT - SKIP)
You can specify “Skip” for scenes you do not want to play back: The selected scenes will be skipped.
1
2
3
4
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Select the scene to be skipped.
Press the MENU button.
6
Press the C button to quit.
A skip icon “
” will appear in the thumbnail
of any scene for which skipping has been set.
Al
l
Pr og r a
m
s
001 / 013
Choose “Scene”, “Edit”,
“Skip”, and then press
Skip icon
Sc ene
De
Ed
Copy
Se e c t
De t
l
i
e
t
t
e
T h umbna
Sk
F ad e
Comb
i
l
the A button.
i
p
PLAY
RAM
l
a
i
l
i
ne
ETC
5
The “Set Skip” screen
will appear: If you are
sure you want to skip the
D i
RETURN
v
i
de
ENTER
RAM
●Releasing Skip
Perform the same procedure as setting skip: The
skip mark willdisappear and skipping ofthe scene
will be released.
selected scene, press the A button.
If you want to change the scene to be skipped,
you can change it on this screen.
After skip setting, the “Set Skip” screen will be
restored.
Note:
• Multiple scenes can be selected for skipping (P.108).
• If you press the MENU button before pressing the A
buttoninstep5,thesubmenuscreenwillappear(P.112).
Repeat step 5 to set skipping of other scenes.
1
ARRANGING ORDER OF SCENES (EDIT - MOVE)
You can arrange scenes within a play list by moving them to desired positions. (P.131) Create a play list
first, and then arrange the scenes [“Creating New Play List (Create)”, P.126].
114
1
DIRECTING SCENES EFFECTIVELY (EDIT - FADE)
You can add fading to the beginning and/ or end of scene.
There are three types of special effects:
Fade Out
Fade Out
Fade Out
Fade In
Fade In
Fade In
White:
Wipe:
B/W:
Fades in from white screen
Fades out to white screen
Fades in from black screen to
vertical direction of screen
Fades out from vertical
direction of screen to black
screen
Fades in from Black and White
screen to color screen
Fades out from color screen to
Black and White screen
1
2
3
4
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Select the scene for adding special effects.
Press the MENU button.
7
Press the C button to quit.
The “[” and/ or “]” icon(s) will appear in the
scenes for which fade in and/ or fade out have
been set.
Al
l
Pr og r a
m
s
005 / 013
Choose, “Scene”, “Edit”,
“Fade” and then press
Sc ene
De
Ed
Copy
Se e c t
De t
l
i
e
t
t
e
“In” effect
Thu
Sk
F ade
m
p
bna
i
l
the A button.
i
l
a
i
l
Co
m
v
b
i
i
ne
PLAY
RAM
ETC
5
The “Fade Set” screen
will appear: If you are
sure you want to add the
D
i
de
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
“Out” effect
fade effect to the scene, press the A button.
If you want to change the scene to which fade is
added, you can change it on this screen.
6
Select the special effects
for “IN” and/ or “OUT”,
choose “Enter”,and then
Fa d e
I N
None
OUT
W
W
h i t e
h i t e
W
W
i
i
pe
pe
B / W
None
B / W
press the A button.
En t e r
Canc e l
ENTER
To cancel setting, choose
“Cancel”.
After setting, the “Fade Set” screen will be
restored.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to add fade to other scenes.
115
1
COMBINING MULTIPLE SCENES (EDIT - COMBINE)
If you have recorded numerous short scenes, combining them will be facilitated by the use of Disc
Navigation.
Be sure to select consecutive multiple scenes. Combining scenes is possible only when “Category: All”
is specified. (P.138) Stills cannot be combined.
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
7
Press the C button to quit.
Select the consecutive multiple scenes to be
combined.
Note:
Scenes in different programs (different recording dates)
cannot be combined: Create a play list first, and then
combine such scenes on the play list.
3
4
Press the MENU button.
Choose, “Scene”, “Edit”,
Sc ene
“Combine” and then
De
Ed
Copy
Se e c t
De t
l
i
e
t
t
e
Thu
Sk
m
p
bna
i
l
press the A button.
i
l
Fade
C o m b i n e
de
a
i
l
ETC
5
The “Combine Scenes”
screen willappear:Ifyou
are sure you want to
D
i
v
i
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
combine the selected scenes, press the A
button.
If you want to change the scenes to be
combined, you can change them on this screen.
6
The screen for verifying
Comb ne Sc e n e s
i
combination will
appear: Choose “YES”,
and then press the A
button.
Comb
YES
i
ne s c e n e s ?
NO
ENTER
The two images
appearing on the verification screen are those of
the first and last scenes to be combined.
Choose “NO” to cancel combination.
After Yes or No setting, the “Combine Scenes”
screen will be restored.
The thumbnail of the first scene will appear in
the combined scene.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to combine other scenes.
116
1
DIVIDING MOVIES (EDIT - DIVIDE)
You can divide a scene into two parts.
To delete unnecessary portion of scene, first divide the scene, and then delete the unnecessary portion.
1
2
3
4
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Select the scene to be divided.
Press the MENU button.
Note:
• If you press the MENU button before pressing the A
buttoninstep5,thesubmenuscreenwillappear.(P.112)
• The status bar of scene being played back can be
switched off or on by pressing the DISPLAY button.
• Searchandframeadvanceareusefulwhendesignating
division points.
Choose, “Scene”, “Edit”,
“Divide” and then press
• If a special effect has been added to the original scene,
the “IN” effect will be added to the first half of scene, and
the “OUT” effect, to the latter half.
• The division point may drift before or after the
designated point by approximately 0.5 seconds.
• Since a scene with a skip set cannot be played back, no
division point can be specified: Release the skip for the
scene before dividing it.
Sc ene
De
Ed
Copy
Se e c t
De t
l
i
e
t
t
e
Thu
Sk
m
p
bna
i
l
the A button.
i
l
Fade
C o m b i n e
de
a
i
l
ETC
5
The “Divide Scene”
screen willappear:Ifyou
are sure you want to
D
i
v
i
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
divide the selected scene, press the A button:
The selected scene will be played back.
• Ifthedivisionpointisatastill,amessagewillappear, but
no division will be made.
• If the division point is at the start or end of a scene, a
message will appear, but no division will be made.
• A movie scene whose recording time is 0.5 seconds or
less cannot be divided.
• If free space available on disc is insufficient, division will
not be possible: Delete unnecessary scenes.
• Pressing the C button on the screen for verification will
restore the thumbnail display screen.
If you want to change the scene to be divided,
you can change it on this screen.
The selected scene will be played back.
6
7
When you reach the
Se l ect D i v i s i o n Po i n t
point where you want to
divide the scene, press
the SELECT button.
002 RAM 0 : 00 : 18
SEL
ENTER
CANCEL
Status bar of scene
being played back
The screen for verifying
division will appear:
Choose “YES”, and then
press the A button.
D
i
v
i
de Scene
D
i
v
i
de s cene?
NO
YES
ENTER
Choose “NO” to cancel
division.
After division, the “Divide Scene” screen will
be restored.
Repeat steps 5-7 to divide another scene.
8
Press the C button to quit.
117
1
COPYING STILLS ON DVD-RAM DISC TO CARD (COPY)
1
Set the power switch to “O VIDEO” or
“N PHOTO“.
Note:
• No movie can be copied.
• If you press the MENU button before pressing the A
buttoninstep6, thesubmenuscreenwillappear. (P.112)
• See “Category” (P.138) to check the stills recorded on
DVD-RAM disc.
• You can also select multiple scenes (P.108).
• Even if all scenes, including movies, are selected to be
copied, only stills will be copied.
• Data on card cannot be copied to disc.
• The quality of still copied from disc to card will be the
same as when you recorded still on disc.
2
3
4
5
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Select the still to be copied.
Press the MENU button.
Choose “Copy” on the
“Scene” menu screen,
Sc ene
De
Ed
Copy
Se e c t
De t
l
i
e
t
t
e
• Stills recorded on a device other than this DVD video
camera/recorder may not be copied normally.
and then press the A
button.
l
a
i
l
ETC
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
6
7
The “Copy to card”
Copy t o c a r d
0 0 3 / 0 1 4
screen willappear:Ifyou
are sure you want to
copy the selected still,
press the A button.
ENTER
EX I T
RAM
Ifyou want to change the
still to be copied, you can change it on this
screen.
The screen for verifying
copy will appear:
Choose “YES”, and then
Copy t o c a r d
Copy PHOTO s c e n e s
t
o
c
a
r
d
?
press the A button.
YES
NO
ENTER
Choose “NO” to cancel
copy.
After Yes or No setting, the “Copy to card”
screen will be restored.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to copy other stills to card.
8
Press the C button to quit.
118
3
LOCKING SCENES ON CARD (LOCK)
You can lock each photo recorded on card so that it will not be deleted or edited by mistake.
1
2
3
4
5
Set the power switch to “P PHOTO”.
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Select the scene to be locked.
Press the MENU button.
●To unlock the scene:
Select the locked scene, and then use the same
procedure as above to unlock the scene: The lock
icon will disappear and locking will be released.
Note:
• If you press the MENU button before pressing the A
buttoninstep6,thesubmenuscreenwillappear.(P.112)
• You can also select multiple scenes (P.108).
• Wheninitializing the card, the locked scenes will also be
deleted.
Choose “Lock” on the
“Scene” menu screen,
Sc ene
De
l
e
t
e
L o c k
DPOF
and then press the A
button.
Se
l
e c t
De t
a
i
l
ENTER
RETURN
6
The “Lock Set” screen
will appear: If you are
sure you want to lock the selected scene, press
the A button.
Lock Set
7 / 19
Lock icon
ENTER
EX I T
If you want to change the scene to be locked,
you can change it on this screen.
After setting, the “Lock Set” screen will be
restored.
Repeat step 6 to lock another scene.
7
Press the C button to quit.
The lock icon “ ” will appear on any scene for
which lock has been set.
119
3
DESIGNATING SCENES TO BE PRINTED (DPOF)
You can use DPOF to set print information, including selection of the scenes to be printed, so that you
will be able to use it on a system conforming to DPOF.
Note:
DPOF stands for digital print order format. DPOF is used to ask a print lab to print recorded stills.
1
2
3
4
5
Set the power switch to “P PHOTO”.
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Select the scene to which DPOF is to be set.
Press the MENU button.
7
Use joystick to specify
the number of prints,
and then press the A
button:
DPOF Se t
7 / 19
3
ENTER
EX
I
T
Tilt it up or to right: To
increase the number one
by one.
Tilt it down or to left: To decrease the number
one by one.
Choose “DPOF” on the
“Scene” menu screen,
Sc ene
De
l
e
t
e
L o c k
DPOF
and then press the A
button.
Pressing the A button will display the DPOF
icon on the selected scene(s).
Se
l
e c t
De t
a
i
l
After setting, the “DPOF Set” screen will be
restored.
Repeat steps 6and 7to set DPOFto another still.
ENTER
RETURN
6
The “DPOF Set” screen
will appear: If you are
sure you want to set DPOF to the scene, press
the A button.
8
Press the C button to quit.
The DPOF icon “ ” will appear on any scene
for which DPOF has been set.
DPOF Se t
7 / 19
6
Note:
• If you press the MENU button before pressing the A
buttoninstep6, thesubmenuscreenwillappear. (P.112)
• You can also select multiple photos (P.108).
• If you specify the number after selecting multiple stills,
the same specified number will be set to all those stills.
• Up to 99 prints can be set for one scene. The maximum
number of settable prints on one card is 999.
• This DVD video camera/recorder may not recognize
DPOF that has been set on another device: Always set
the DPOF on this DVD video camera/recorder.
DPOF icon
ENTER
EXIT
If you want to change the scene to which DPOF
is set, you can change it on this screen.
120
123
SELECTING SCENES USING MENU SCREEN (SELECT)
You can use this “Select” function to select consecutive scenes at one time.
This function is useful when there are numerous scenes.
1
2
3
4
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Select the first scene to be selected.
Press the MENU button.
5
Choose “Start →
Sc ene
Current”, “Current →
End” or “All” and then
press the A button.
De
Ed
Copy
Se e c t
De t
l
i
e
t
t
e
l
S
Cu
A
t
a
r
l
r
r
t
–
Cu
–
r
r en t
a
i
l
en t
End
ETC
l
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Choose “Select” on the “Scene” menu screen.
Al
l
Pr ogr ams
006 / 011
Current scene
PLAY
RAM
Al
l
Pr ogr ams
006 / 011
Al
l
Pr ogr ams
006 / 011
Al
l
Pr ogr a
m
s
006 / 011
PLAY
RAM
PLAY
RAM
PLAY
RAM
DESELECT ALL
DESELECT ALL
DESELECT ALL
“Start → Current” is specified:
The scenes from the first to
current will be selected.
“Current → End” is specified:
The scenes from the current
to end will be selected.
“All” is specified:
Allscenesfromthefirsttoend
will be selected
●Deselecting selected scenes
Deselecting scenes one by one:
While you are displaying the “All Programs”
screen on which scenes have been selected, choose
the scene to be deselected and then press the
SELECT button.
Deselecting all the selected scenes at once:
While you are displaying the “All Programs”
screen on which scenes have been selected, press
the C button.
Note:
Up to 999 scenes can be selected.
121
123
DISPLAYING INFORMATION USING MENU SCREEN (DETAIL)
You can display various information for a scene: the recording mode, recording date/ time and length,
special effects and movie quality mode.
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
If you have selected multiple scenes, the
information shown below will appear.
Pressing the C button will restore the
thumbnail display screen.
Select the scene whose information you wish to
know.
(When using disc)
3
4
Press the MENU button.
De t a i
V I DEO
( XTRA) :
( F NE) :
( STD )
( -
PHOTO
l
:
1m
0m
1m
0m
1m
0
i
i
i
i
i
n43sec
0sec
n43sec
(
(
(
(
(
2s c e n e s )
0s c e n e s )
2s c e n e s )
0s c e n e s )
0s c e n e s )
Choose “Scene”, “Detail”, and then press the
A button.
n
I
*1
:
:
:
n
n
0sec
0sec
-
-
)
*2
*3
The detailed information on the scene will
appear.
RETURN
*1 With DVD-R disc, the quality mode (FINE, STD or
LPCM) selected first will appear.
(When using disc)
(When using card)
*2 Numberofsceneswhosequalitymodeisunknown:
This will appear when the disc has a scene
recorded on a device other than this DVD video
camera/recorder,onlyifthedischasascenewhose
mode is unknown.
*2
*3
De
t
a
i
l
De
t
a
i
l
Sc e n e N o. 0 0 7
IDEO (F NE )
9 / 30 2004
:O
Sc e n e N o.
7
(
V
I
1m i n13 s e c
00:00AM
1
0
0
–
/
0
0
0
7
6
8
4
0
)
Da t
S k
e
p
:
/
8
:
Da t
L o c k :O
DPOF Nu
e
:
9 / 30
2004
:
00:00AM
i
f
f
f
f
*1
Fa d e IN : None OUT :None
m
ber o f p r
i
n
t
s :
6
Also, this will not appear when a DVD-R disc is
used.
PREV NEXT RETURN
PREV
NEXT RETURN
*3 This will not appear with DVD-R disc, since no still
image can be recorded on it.
*1 Not displayed with DVD-R disc.
*2 May not appear if the loaded card does not
comply with DCF.
(When using card)
*3 Number of pixels on still in horizontal direction:
This may not appear with a JPEG file that does
De t a i
l
Scene No.
6
not conform to this DVD video camera/recorder.
9
/
27 / 2004 12 : 5 0:00PM
Scene No.
7
Note:
9
/
30 / 2004
8
: 0 0:00AM
Tiltingthejoysticktorightwilldisplayinformationonthe
following scene; tilting the joystick to left will display
information on the preceding scene.
S c e n e s :
2
RETURN
Note:
5
Press the C button to quit.
• If multiple scenes have been selected, the total
recording time of the selected scenes (total number in
case of stills) will appear.
• IfaDVD-RdiscrecordedonadeviceotherthanthisDVD
videocamera/recorderisinserted(alreadyfinalized),no
scene information will appear.
122
Program
WHAT IS “PROGRAM”?
Program refers to an assembly of scenes recorded on the same date regardless of whether they are movie
or still.
Scene No. 1
Scene No. 2
Scene No. 3
Scene No. 4
Scene No. 5
Scene No. 6
9:00AM
Movie
11:45AM Still
1:30PM
Movie
5:20PM
8:00PM
Movie
10:20AM
Still
Still
Program No. 1
Recorded on September 10
12
SWITCHING TO THUMBNAIL DISPLAY OF SPECIFIC DATE (SWITCH)
Since the scenes recorded on this DVD video camera/ recorder are collected as “programs” for each
recording date, selecting a program will allow you to display only the scenes on a specific date.
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
Note:
• Pressing the C button on the “Switch Program” screen
will restore the Disc Navigation screen.
• Thedatesdisplayedontheprogramselectscreenwillbe
in the Date Mode used when the first scenes of
programs were recorded, and the date displays
M/D/Y, D/M/Y and Y/M/D may be mixed.
• If a DVD-RAM or DVD-R disc recorded on another
device is loaded in this DVD video camera/recorder, the
program may not be a collection of recordings on the
same date.
Choose “Switch” on the
“Program” menu
P r og r am
screen, and then press
the A button.
Sw
i
t
c h
P
T
l
i
a y
t
l
e
ETC
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
4
Select the program to be
displayed, and then
press the A button.
Sw
i
t
c h P r og r a
m
A
l
l
Pr og r
a
ms
01
02
03
8
9
9
/
/
/
3 0 / 2004
1 0 / 2004
3 0 / 2004
The Disc Navigation
screen of the selected
program will appear.
ENTER
RETURN
03 9 / 30 / 2004
001 / 008
PLAY
RAM
123
12
PLAYING BACK PROGRAM (PLAY)
You can play back only the selected program.
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
4
Select the program to be played back, and then
press the A button.
Playback will start from the first scene of the
selected program.
Choose “Play” on the
“Program” menu
P r og r am
S
t
a
r
t
P r og r a
m
screen, and then press
the A button.
Sw
i
t
c h
P
T
l
i
a y
t
l
e
A
l
l
Pr og r
a
ms
ETC
01
02
03
8
9
9
/
/
/
3 0 / 2004
1 0 / 2004
3 0 / 2004
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
8
:
00AM
9
/
30 / 2004
ENTER
RETURN
Note:
If“RepeatPlay:On”is specified, the selectedprogram will
be repeatedly played back. (P.138 PLAYING BACK
SCENES REPEATEDLY (REPEAT PLAY))
1
CHANGING TITLE OF PROGRAM (TITLE)
The recording date/ time has initially been attached to any program.
You can change the recording date/ time to any desired title.
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
5
Select a letter and then
press the A button:
The selected letter will
be entered.
Title input bar
T I T L E
9
/ 3 0 / 2004
1
2
3
C
P
Ì
4
5
6
F
S
Á
Ä
7
G
T
É
Ë
8
H
U
Í
9
I
V
Ó
Ö
0
J
W
Ú
Ü
SPACE
A
N
À
Â
B
O
È
Ê
D
Q
Ò
Ô
E
R
Ù
Û
K
X
Ã
Ç
L
Y
Ñ
M
Z
Õ
Choose “Title” on the “Program” menu screen,
and then press the A button.
Repeat this procedure to
create a title.
Î
Ï
1
Enter
DELETE
Cancel
SELECT
SEL
INPUT
4
Select the program
P r og r a
m
T
i
t
l
e
whose title you want to
change, and then press
the A button.
Input mode
01
02
03
8
9
9
/
/
/
3 0 / 2004
1 0 / 2004
3 0 / 2004
Palette for selecting
characters
ENTER
RETURN
The screen for setting a
title will appear.
124
6
7
After entering the title,
choose “Enter” and then
press the A button.
●Characters available for entering
title
You can use the joystick to select characters from
the “capital letter”, “small letter” and “symbol”
input modes.
With step 5, select the input mode and then press
the A button, or press the DISPLAY button.
T I T L E
a
t
a
Pa r k
1
a
n
à
â
2
b
o
è
ê
3
c
p
ì
4
d
q
ò
ô
5
e
r
ù
û
6
f
s
á
ä
7
g
t
é
ë
8
h
u
í
9
i
v
ó
ö
0
j
w
ú
ü
SPACE
k
x
ã
ç
l
m
z
õ
y
ñ
ß
î
ï
2
Enter
Cancel
SELECT
SEL
ENTER
DELETE
The screen for verifying
the change in title will
appear: Choose “YES”,
and then press the A
button.
T I T L E
a
n
t
i
a
h
Pa
r
k
F
i
s
t
i
t
l
e
s
e
t
t
i
n g ?
T I T L E
9
/ 3 0 / 2004
T I T L E
9
/ 3 0 / 2004
1
a
n
à
â
2
b
o
è
ê
3
c
p
ì
4
d
q
ò
ô
5
e
r
ù
û
6
f
s
á
ä
7
g
t
é
ë
8
h
u
í
9
i
v
ó
ö
0
j
w
ú
ü
SPACE
1
2
3
C
P
Ì
4
5
6
F
S
Á
Ä
7
G
T
É
Ë
8
H
U
Í
9
I
V
Ó
Ö
0
J
W
Ú
Ü
SPACE
YES
NO
A
N
À
Â
B
O
È
Ê
D
Q
Ò
Ô
E
R
Ù
Û
K
X
Ã
Ç
L
Y
Ñ
M
Z
Õ
k
x
ã
ç
l
m
z
õ
y
ñ
ß
ENTER
Î
Ï
î
ï
1
Enter
DELETE
Cancel
SELECT
2
Enter
DELETE
Cancel
SELECT
Choose “NO” to cancel
changing of the title.
SEL
SEL
CHANGE
CHANGE
After Yes or No setting, the Disc Navigation
screen of the selected program will appear.
Input mode
T I T L E
9
4
/ 3 0 / 2004
Note:
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
SPACE
• Ifyou wish to delete the letterfor title, press theCbutton
once: The input letter will be deleted. Holding down the
C button will delete all letters in the TITLE column.
• You can also use the DELETE button on remote control
to delete any input letters.
3
Enter
DELETE
Cancel
SELECT
SEL
CHANGE
• Pressing the SELECT button on the title setting screen
(in step 5) will change the cursor position from the title
inputbartocharacterselectpalette,inputmodenumber,
and then to “Cancel”.
• To cancel the setting of title, choose “NO” on the screen
for verifying the entered title: The screen for verifying
cancellation of title setting will appear. To cancel title
setting, choose “YES”.
• If you press the C button on the screen for verifying
change in title, the title setting screen will be restored.
• Double byte characters set on other devices may be
displayed blank on this DVD video camera/recorder.
• TitlessetonthisDVDvideocamera/recordermaynotbe
visible on other devices.
125
1
Play List
WHAT IS “PLAY LIST”?
You can create a play list on this DVD video camera/ recorder by gathering your favorites from the
recorded scenes.
Since the play list is not created by copying data, you will consume little of the disc capacity by making
a play list. On the other hand, deleting scenes on play list will not increase the remaining disc capacity
for recording.
Example:
Program 1 (recorded on September 27, 2004)
Program 2 (recorded on September 30, 2004)
Play list 1 created
Play list of up to No. 99 can be created, and up to 999 scenes can be included in each play list of No. 1 to
No. 99.
CREATING NEW PLAY LIST (CREATE)
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
With the created play list, you can also add
scenes recorded on another day or delete
unnecessary scenes afterwards.
Select the scenes to be programmed in a play
list.
6
When creation ofa play list is complete,the Disc
Navigation screen will appear.
3
4
Press the MENU button.
Choose “Create” on the
“PlayList” menu
screen, and then press
the A button.
Note:
P
l
a y L
i
s
S
P
t
w
l
• You can also select multiple scenes (P.108).
• If the added scene had skip or fade setting, that
information will also be added to the play list.
• Thedate/timewhenaplaylistwascreatedwillappearas
the title for the play list. This title can later be changed
(P.132).
i
t
c h
ay
C r e a t
Ed
T
e
i
t
l
t
l
e
i
e
t
ETC
De
ENTER
e
RETURN
RAM
5
The scene select screen
will appear: If the
selected scenes on the
play list are the ones
you want,presstheA
button.
• If free space available on disc is insufficient, creation of
new play list may not be possible: Delete unnecessary
scenes.
• Only the data on scenes is recorded on play list: If you
create or delete play lists, the original scenes in
programs will not be erased.
0 5 9 / 30 / 2004 8 : . .
006 / 006
Editing scenes on play list will not affect the scenes in
programs.
• If you press the MENU button before pressing A in
step 5, the submenu will appear (see page 112).
If you want to change
the scenes with which
you want to create a
PLAY
RAM
play list, you can change them on this screen.
126
SWITCHING TO DISPLAY OF EACH PLAY LIST (SWITCH)
Select the desired one of multiple play lists: The Disc Navigation screen of the selected play list will
appear.
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
4
Usethe“Switch Playlist”
screen to select the play
list you wish to display,
and then press the A
button.
0 1 8 / 30 / 2004 1 2 : . .
001 / 008
Choose “Switch” on the
P l a y L
i
s
t
PLAY
RAM
“PlayList” menu screen,
and then press the A
button.
Sw
i
t
c h
P
l
a y
C r e a t e
The Disc Navigation
screen ofthe selected play list will be displayed.
Ed
i
t
t
l
T
i
e
ETC
D e l
ENTER
e
t e
RETURN
RAM
Note:
To display the Disc Navigation screen showing all
programs(allrecordedscenes),choose“AllPrograms”on
the “Switch PlayList” screen.
Sw
i
t
c h
P
l
l a y L
i
s
t
A
l
Pr og r
a
m
s
01
02
03
8
9
9
/
/
/
3 0 / 2004 12
:
:
:
3 0PM
0 0AM
3 0AM
1 0 / 2004
1 2 / 2004
8
9
ENTER
RETURN
●Editing on play list
When making settings on play list, such as
Deleting scene,
Changing thumbnail,
Setting skip,
P.111
P.113
P.114
P.115
P.116
P.117
P.118
P.124, 132
changing title, setting skip, adding fade, etc., use
the same procedure for setting on program or
scenes. Perform these settings, referring to the
following reference pages:
Adding fade,
Combining scenes,
Dividing a scene,
Copying to card
Changing title,
Arranging order of scenes, P.131
PLAYING BACK A PLAY LIST (PLAY)
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
4
Use the “Start Playlist”
screen to select the play
list to be played back,
and then press the A
button.
Choose “Play” on the
1
2
:
30PM
P l a y L
i
s
t
8
/
30 / 2004
“PlayList” menu screen,
and then press the A
button.
Sw
i
t
c h
P
l
a y
C r e a t e
The selected play list will
Ed
i
t
t
l
be played back from the first scene. To cancel
playback midway, press the C button: The Disc
navigation screen of the play list being played
back will appear.
T
i
e
ETC
D e l
ENTER
e
t e
RETURN
RAM
Note:
S
t
a
r
t
P
/
l a y L
i
s
t
If “Repeat Play On” is specified, the play list will be
repeatedly played back (see page 138).
01
02
03
04
8
9
9
9
3 0 / 2004 12
:
:
:
:
3 0PM
0 0AM
3 0AM
1 5PM
/
/
/
1 0 / 2004
1 2 / 2004
2 0 / 2004
8
9
3
ENTER
RETURN
127
ADDING SCENES TO PLAY LIST (EDITING PLAY LIST)
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
5
Tilt the joystick down to move the cursor to the
lower row, and tilt it to left or right to select the
point where the scene is to be inserted.
Choose “Edit” on the
P l a y L
i
s
t
Ed
i
t
P
l a yL
i
s
t
“PlayList” menu screen,
and then press the A
button.
A
l
l
P r o g r ams
0 0 4 / 0 1 4
0 0 8 / 0 0 8
Sw
i
t
c h
P
l
a y
C r e a t e
Scene to be added
Insertion position
P
l
a yL
i
s
t
N
o .
0
1
Ed
i
t
t
l
T
i
e
ETC
D e l
ENTER
e
t e
RETURN
RAM
ADD
EX I T
4
Use the play list select
screen to select the play
list to which you wish to
add scenes, and then
press the A button.
*1 *2
Ed
i
t
P
l a y L
i
s
t
*1: Number of scene before insertion position cursor
*2: Number of all scenes on play list
01
02
03
04
8
9
9
9
/
/
/
/
3 0 / 2004 12
:
:
:
:
3 0PM
0 0AM
3 0AM
1 5PM
1 0 / 2004
1 2 / 2004
2 0 / 2004
8
9
3
6
Tilt the joystick up to move the cursor to the
upper row, and tilt it to left or right to point the
cursor to the scene to be added.
ENTER
RETURN
The scenes of the
program that was
displayed in step 1 will
appear in the upper row,
and the scenes of
selected play list will
appear in the lower row.
Ed
i
A
t
l
P
l a yL
P r o g r ams
i
s
t
7
Press the A button to copy the scene.
l
0 0 4 / 0 1 4
0 0 7 / 0 0 7
After adding scenes is completed, the edited
play list will appear.
Repeat steps 5−7 to add other scenes.
P
l
a yL
i
s
t
N
o .
0
1
ADD
EX I T
8
Press the Cbutton:The screen for verifying exit
will appear.
Note:
If the DISPLAY button is
pressed when the
Ed
i
A
t
l
P
l a yL
P r o g r ams
i
s
t
l
0 0 4 / 0 1 4
0 0 8 / 0 0 8
thumbnails are displayed,
the recording date/time of
the selected scene will
appear across the bottom of
screen. Press DISPLAY
button again to restore the
previous screen.
Note:
• The cursor shows the position where the scene is to be
added.
P
l
a yL
i
s
t
N
1
o
2
.
:
0
1
• You can also select multiple scenes (P.108).
• Pressing C in the middle of adding scenes will display
the screen for verifying an exit from “Edit PlayList”.
Choose “YES” to exit the edition of play list. Choosing
“NO” will restore the “Edit PlayList” screen.
• IfyoupresstheMENUbuttoninstep5or6,thesubmenu
screen for editing play list will appear. You can also use
this submenu to add scenes (see page 112).
8
/ 3 0 / 2004
3 0: 0 0PM
Recording date/time
128
DELETING SCENES FROM PLAY LIST (EDITING PLAY LIST)
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
4
Press the A button.
Ed
i
A
t
l
P
l a yL
P r o g r ams
i
s
t
l
0 0 4 / 0 1 4
0 0 7 / 0 0 7
Display the editing
screen of the play list to
be edited.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to
delete other scenes.
Ed
i
A
t
l
P
l a yL
P r o g r ams
i
s
t
P
l
a yL
i
s
t
No . 02
EX I T
l
0 0 4 / 0 1 4
0 0 8 / 0 0 8
DELETE
P
l
a yL
i
s
t
N
o .
0
2
5
Press the C button: The
screen for verifying exit
will appear.
Perform steps 2−4 on
page 128.
DELETE
EX I T
3
Move the cursor to the play list in lower row,
and place the cursor on the scene to be deleted.
Note:
• You can also select multiple scenes (P.108).
• Place the cursor on scene to be deleted, and then press
the DELETE button on remote control: You can also
delete the scene on the play list.
ADDING SCENES USING SUBMENU FOR EDITING (EDITING PLAY LIST)
You can use the menu screen to add scenes to a play list.
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
5
6
Press the MENU button.
Display the editing screen of the play list to be
edited.
Choose“Add”,and then
press the A button.
Ed
i
t
a ms
Ex
Add
0 0 4 / 0 1 4
0 0 7 / 0 0 7
i
t
P
l
a yL
i
s
t
No . 0
3
Perform steps 2−4 on page 128.
Repeat steps 3−6 to add
other scenes.
ENTER
RETURN
3
4
From the play list in lower row, select the
position where you wish to insert a scene.
7
Press the C button to
quit.
Select the scenes to be added from the upper
row.
Ed
i
A
t
l
P
l a yL
P r o g r ams
i
s
t
l
0 0 4 / 0 1 4
0 0 8 / 0 0 8
P
l
a yL
i
s
t
No . 03
Ed
i
t
P
l a yL
i
s
t
A
l
l
P r o g r ams
0 0 4 / 0 1 4
0 0 7 / 0 0 7
Scene to be
added
ADD
EX I T
P
l
a yL
i
s
t
No . 03
Note:
Insertion
position
• The selected scenes will be added in the insertion
position.
ADD
EX I T
• You can also select multiple scenes (P.108).
129
DELETING SCENES USING SUBMENU FOR EDITING (EDITING PLAY LIST)
You can delete scenes from play list on the editing screen.
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
5
Choose “Delete” on the
“Edit” menu screen, and
then press the A
button.
Ed
i
t
s
Ex
De l e t e
0 0 1 / 0 1 4
0 0 7 / 0 0 7
i
t
Display the editing
screen of the play list to
be edited.
Ed
i
A
t
l
P
l a yL
P r o g r a ms
i
s
t
P
l
a yL No .
i
s
t
0
4
l
0 0 1 / 0 1 4
0 0 7 / 0 0 7
ENTER
RETURN
P
l
a yL
i
s
t
No .
0
4
Repeat steps 3−5: other
Perform steps 2−4 on
page 128.
scenes can be deleted.
ADD
EX I T
6
Press the Cbutton:The screen for verifying exit
will appear.
3
4
Move the cursor to the play list in lower row.
Select the scene to be deleted,and then press the
MENU button.
Note:
• If all scenes on play list are deleted, theplay list itself will
also be deleted.
• You can also select multiple scenes (P.108).
SELECTING SCENES USING SUBMENU FOR EDITING (EDITING PLAY LIST)
You can specify the range of scenes when adding or deleting consecutive multiple scenes to/ from play
list. This “Select” menu item is useful when selecting consecutive multiple scenes in items for adding or
deleting scenes using menu on page 121.
1
2
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
4
Choose “Start →
S e
l
e c t
Current”, “Current →
End”, “All” on the
“Select” menu screen,
and then press the A
button.
l
l
P r o g r ams
0 0 1 / 0 1 4
0 0 7 / 0 0 7
S
t
a
r
r
r
t
–
Cu
–
r
r en t
Display the editing
screen of the play list to
be edited.
Cu
en t
End
Ed
i
t
P
l a yL
i
s
t
P
l
l
A
A
l
l
P r o g r ams
0 0 4 / 0 1 4
0 0 7 / 0 0 7
ENTER
RETURN
P
l
a yL
i
s
t
No . 04
Perform steps 2−4 on
page 128.
ADD
EX I T
Note:
See page 121 for the status of scenes to be selected.
3
Specify the first scene of those you wish to
select, and then press the MENU button.
5
Press the Cbutton:The screen for verifying exit
will appear.
130
ARRANGING ORDER OF SCENES (MOVE)
You can move scenes only when “Category: All” is specified.
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
9
The screen for verifying
move will appear:
Choose “YES”, and then
press the A button.
Move Scene
Move sc e n e s?
YES NO
Choose “Switch” on the “PlayList” menu
screen, and then press the A button.
ENTER
Choose “NO” to cancel
move.
4
5
6
Select the scene to be moved.
Press the MENU button.
Choose “Scene”, “Edit”,
After Yes or No setting, the scene select screen
will be restored.
Repeat steps 7−9 to move another scene.
10Press the C button to quit.
Sc ene
“Move”, and then press
the A button.
De
Ed
Copy
Se e c t
De t
l
i
e
t
t
e
Thu
Sk
F ade
m
p
bna
i
l
i
Note:
l
Co
m
v
b
i
i
ne
• If you press the MENU button before pressing the A
button in step 7, the submenu screen will appear.
• You can also move multiple scenes (P.108).
• Only scenes on play list can be moved.
a
i
l
D
M
i
de
ETC
7
The “Move Scenes”
screen willappear:Ifyou
are sure you want to
o v e
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
move the scene, press the A button.
If you want to change the scene to be moved,
you can change it on this screen.
8
Move the “ ” mark to the
Se
l
e c t
I
n s e r t P o
i
n
t
0 06 / 0 1 9
position where you wish
to move the scene, and
then press the A
button.
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
131
CHANGING TITLE OF PLAY LIST (TITLE)
The play lists have serial numbers in the order you have created them, along with the created dates/
times: You can change this title at any time.
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
5
6
The screen for verifying
exit will appear: Choose
“YES” and then press the
A button.
T I T L E
a
n
t
a
Pa
r
k
F
i
i
s
h
t
i
t
l
e
s
e
t
t
i
n g ?
YES
NO
Choose “Title” on the “PlayList” menu screen,
and then press the A button.
ENTER
Press the C button to
quit.
4
Use the “Playlist Title” screen to select the play
list whose title you wish to change, and then
press the A button.
0 1
a
t
a
Pa
r
k
001 / 008
After changing the title,
the Disc Navigation
screen on the play list
whose title has been
changed will appear.
See “Changing Title of
PLAY
RAM
P
l a y L
i
s
t
T i
t
l
e
Program (Title)” on
page 124for how toenter
a title.
01
02
03
04
8
/
3 0 / 2004 12
:
:
:
:
3 0PM
0 0AM
3 0AM
1 5PM
9
9
9
/
/
/
1 0 / 2004
1 2 / 2004
2 0 / 2004
RETURN
8
9
3
ENTER
Note:
The registered title can be changed at any time using the
same procedure.
DELETING PLAY LIST (DELETE)
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
5
The screen for verifying deletion will appear:
Choose “YES”, and then press the A button.
Choose “NO” to cancel deletion.
After Yes or No setting, the Disc Navigation
screen of all programs will be restored.
Choose “Delete” on the “PlayList” menu
screen, and then press the A button.
4
Use the “Delete Playlist”
Note:
De
l
e
t
e
P
l a y L
i
s
t
screen to select the play
list you wish to delete,
and then press the A
button.
Even if you delete a play list, the original scenes stored on
disc will not be deleted.
01
02
03
04
8
/
3 0 / 2004 12
:
:
:
:
3 0PM
0 0AM
3 0AM
1 5PM
9
9
9
/
/
/
1 0 / 2004
1 2 / 2004
2 0 / 2004
RETURN
8
9
3
ENTER
De
l
e
t
e
P
P
8
l
l
a y L
a y L
/ 30
i
i
/
s
s
t
t
No. 01
2004 1 2 : 30PM
De
YES
l
e
t
e
P
l
a y L
NO
i
s
t
?
ENTER
132
123
Go To
From the Disc Navigation screen, you can jump to the first scene or last scene.
TOP (END)
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
Choose “Top” or “End”
Go To
on the “Go To” menu
screen, and then press
the A button.
To p
En d
ETC
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Al
l
Pr ogr a
m
s
014 / 014
PLAY
RAM
(When “End” is specified)
133
Disc or Card Management
123
VERIFYING REMAINING FREE SPACE ON DISC OR CARD (CAPACITY)
You can find out how long you will be able to record on one side of disc or on card.
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
4
Press the C button to quit.
The Disc Navigation screen will be restored.
Choose “Capacity” on the “Disc” or “Card”
menu screen, and then press the A button.
Note:
With a write-protected disc (see “Terminology”, P. 160) or
locked card, the remaining space will always be displayed
as “0”.
(When using disc)
(When using card)
Cap a c
A p p r o x .
V I DEO( XTRA) : 17
V I DEO( F NE) : 26
i
t
y
Cap a c
A p p r o x .
PHOTO( FINE)
PHOTO( NORM)
PHOTO( ECO)
i
t
y
m
m
m
i
i
i
n
n
n
:
:
:
:
462
924
1848
9 6%
I
*1
*2
V I DEO( STD)
PHOTO
:
54
: 996
9 0%
Cap a c
i
t
y
Cap a c
i
t
y
:
RETURN
RETURN
*1 With DVD-R disc: The quality mode first used for
recording with disc will appear.
*2 With DVD-R disc: This will not be displayed.
1
PROTECTING DISC FROM WRITING (PROTECT DISC)
You can protect a DVD-RAM disc in order to prevent recorded images from being erased or edited by
mistake. Further recording will not be possible on protected disc until the protection is released.
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
Choose “NO” to cancel
protection.
After “YES” or “NO”
setting, the Disc
Navigation screen will
be restored.
Al
l
Pr og r a
m
s
001 / 019
Choose “Protect Disc”
D i s c
PLAY
RAM
on the “Disc” menu
screen, and then press
the A button.
Ca pac
P r t e c
Fo rma
Upd a t e Con t r o l
ENTER RETURN
i
t y
t
D
Disc protect icon
o
D
i
i
s
sc
c
Note:
• To release disc protection,
t
ETC
I
n f o.
RAM
perform the same procedure as above: The screen for
verifying the release of protection will appear.
Choose “YES” to release the protection.
4
The screen for verifying
protection will appear:
P r o t e c t D i s c
W r i t e p r o t e c t d i s c ?
YES NO
Choose “YES”, and
then press the A
button.
ENTER
134
13
INITIALIZING DVD-RAM DISC OR CARD (FORMAT DISC. FORMAT CARD)
• Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger to power the DVD video camera/
recorder for initialization. If the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off
during initialization and the initialization is interrupted, incorrect
Before You Begin
initialization will result and the incorrectly initialized disc will be unusable.
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
Note:
• Initialization will delete all the recorded contents on disc
or card: Be careful not to delete data by mistake.
• Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger when initializing
disc or card so that the DVD video camera/recorder is
not turned off midway. If initialization is interrupted by
power off, the disc or card will not be initialized correctly,
or it may be damaged.
Choose “Format Disc” or “Format Card” on the
“Disc” or “Card” menu screen, and then press
the A button.
• It may not be possible to initialize a disc with many
scratches or dirt: Such a disc cannot be used (P.82).
• If you use a brand-new DVD-R disc, message “Disc is
not formatted” will appear: Initialize the disc, following
the subsequent messages (P.45).
• This DVD video camera/recorder may not recognize
some discs or cards that have been initialized on PC or
a device other than this DVD video camera/recorder.
• Ifyou attemptto initialize a disc or card in this DVD video
camera/recorder when it is connected to PC via PC
connection cable, the disc or card may not be initialized
and may be unusable on this DVD video camera/
recorder.
The screen for verifying “Format Disc” or
“Format Card” will appear.
4
Choose “YES”, and then press the A button.
Choose “NO” to cancel initialization.
F o r
m
A
a t D i s c
F o r
m
A
a t Ca r d
l
l
d a t a
w
i
l
l
b e d e l e t e d .
l
l
d a t a
w
i
l
l
b e d e l e t e d .
F o r
m
a t t h e
d
i
s
c
no
w
?
F o r
m
a t t h e ca r d no
w
?
YES
NO
YES
NO
ENTER
ENTER
(When using
DVD-RAM disc)
(When using card)
When initializing one side of the disc is
complete,the DVD video camera/ recorder will
return to the recording pause status.
135
1
UPDATING CONTROL INFORMATION OF DVD-RAM DISC
(UPDATE CONTROL INFO.)
Disc Navigation in this DVD video camera/ recorder handles information on scenes, such as thumbnail,
skip, fade, in a particular manner. If you use another device to edit a disc recorded on this DVD video
camera/ recorder, and then use the data again with DiscNavigation in this DVD video camera/ recorder,
the Disc Navigation may not appear normally. If this happens, use the Update Control Info function to
update the data.
• When using the AC adapter/charger to power the DVD video camera/
recorder for updating control information, make sure that power is not
turned off during updating: If the DVD video camera/recorder is turned off
duringupdatingandtheupdatingisinterrupted,thecontrolinformationwill
not be updated correctly.
Before You Begin
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
5
Press the C button to quit.
Note:
• Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger when updating
the control information so that the DVD video camera/
recorder is not turned off midway. If updating of control
information is interrupted by power off, the control
information will not be updated correctly.
• It may take time to update the control information if the
disc has many recorded scenes.
Choose “Update Control Info.” on the “Disc”
menu screen, and then press the A button.
The screen for verifying “Update ControlInfo.”
will appear.
• Pressing the C button on the screen for verification will
restore the thumbnail display screen.
4
Choose “YES”, and then
press the A button.
Upda te Con
t
r
o
l
I
n
o
f o.
Upda te Con
YES
t
r
l
I
n
f o?
The message for
NO
proceeding will appear,
and then the Disc
ENTER
Navigation menu screen
will be restored.
A black screen may appear while the message
for updating is displayed.
Choose “NO” to cancel updating.
136
2
FINALIZING DVD-R DISC (FINALIZE DISC)
• Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger to power the DVD video camera/
recorder when finalizing a DVD-R disc. If the DVD video camera/recorder
is turned off during finalization and the finalization is interrupted, incorrect
finalization will result, and at worst, the disc may be damaged.
Before You Begin
If you want to play back a DVD-R disc recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder, using a device
conforming to 8 cm DVD-R disc - such as a DVD player, etc. - you must finalize the disc on this DVD
video camera/recorder. (See “Terminology”, P.160)
The finalized DVD-R disc can be played on a DVD player, as “DVD Video”: The date of program will
appear on the menu screen of DVD player as a title.
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
5
When finalization is complete, the Disc
Navigation screen of all programs will appear.
SELECT I TEM
001 / 010
Choose “Finalize Disc” on the “Disc” menu
screen, and then press the A button.
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
:
:
:
:
:
1
1
1
1
1
9
9
9
0
0
/
/
/
/
/
1
1
1
0
1
0
5
8
8
0
/
/
/
/
/
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
4
0
0
0
0
1
6
7
8
9
0
:
:
:
:
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
/
/
/
/
/
1
2
3
1
1
3
3
0
3
0
/
/
/
/
/
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
4
The disc will be finalized.
Choose “YES”, and then
TOP
PREV
NEXT
END
4
(Screen when viewed
on DVD player)
F i n a l i z e D i s c
press the A button.
F u r t h e r r e c o r d i n g o n t h i s
d i s c w i l l b e i m p o s s i b l e .
F i n a l i z e ? ( A p p o r o x . 2 3 m i n . )
YES
NO
Note:
• Do not finalize a disc recorded on this DVD video
camera/recorder using any other device.
• No recording can be done on any DVD-R disc that has
been finalized.
ENTER
The message showing
that the disc is being
finalized will appear,
and the disc will then be
finalized.
willappear on the Disc
Navigation screen for a
finalized disc.
Al
l
Pr og r a
m
s
001/ 015
• IfthediscintheDVDvideocamera/recorderhasalready
been finalized, you cannot choose “Finalize Disc”.
• Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger when finalizing
disc. Finalization cannot be executed using a battery.
If finalization is interrupted by power off, the disc will not
be finalized correctly, or it may be damaged.
• The time required to finalize disc that appears on the
“Finalize Disc” screen is only for reference.
• The shorter the recording time on disc, the longer it will
take to finalize it.
PLAY
Finalized DVD-R disc
137
1
Others
DISPLAYING MOVIES OR STILLS INDEPENDENTLY (CATEGORY)
Scenes recorded on this DVD video camera/ recorder will be displayed in the order of recording
regardless of whether they are movies or stills. You can use the Disc Navigation screen to switch this
display to stills only or movies only.
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
4
Specify the desired
option for display, and
then press the A
button.
Al
l
Pr og r a
m
s
006/ 015
Choose “Category” on
O t h e r s
PLAY
RAM
the “Others” menu
screen, and then press
the A button.
(When “PHOTO” is
specified)
A l
V I DEO
l
C a t e g o r y
R e p e a t P l a y
PHOTO
All:
To display all scenes, movies or stills,
in the order of recording.
ENTER
RAM
RETURN
VIDEO: To display only movies in the order of
recording.
PHOTO: To display only photos in the order of
recording.
12
PLAYING BACK SCENES REPEATEDLY (REPEAT PLAY)
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
●When Repeat Play is set:
If one scene has been specified: When playback of
the last scene is finished,playback ofallscenes will
repeat from the first scene.
If the range for playback has been specified:
Playback of the scenes in that range will repeat.
Choose “Repeat Play”
on the “Others” menu
O t h e r s
screen, and then press
●To release Repeat Play
Use one of the following 3 methods to release:
• Choose “Off” in step 4 above.
• Turn the DVD video camera/ recorder off once.
• Press the DISC EJECT button to remove the disc.
the A button.
C a t e g o r y
R e p e a t P l a y
On
O
f
f
ENTER
RAM
RETURN
4
Choose “On”, and then
press the A button:
Playback will start.
Choose “Off” to cancel Repeat Play Setting.
Note:
• Press the C button to terminate playback. However, the
Repeat Play setting will not be cancelled.
• Still images can also be played back repeatedly.
• Repeat playback will not function when playback is
instructed from the recording pause status.
138
3
SLIDE SHOW (CONTINUOUS PLAYBACK OF STILLS)
If you play back stills recorded on a card, the DVD video camera/ recorder will enter the playback pause
status after each still is played back.
Setting Slide Show allows you to continuously play back stills.
1
2
3
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
Press the MENU button.
Note:
• One still is played for approx. 5 seconds.
• With slide show, playback starts from the first still on
card.
• If you press the C button or turn the DVD video camera/
recorder off, Slide Show will be canceled.
Choose “Slide Show”,
S l i d e S h o w
“All” or “DPOF”, and
then press the A
button.
A l
DPOF
l
ENTER
RETURN
All:
Toplay allstills
recorded on
card in slide show.
DPOF: To play only stills to which DPOF has
been set in slide show.
When playback is finished, the DVD video
camera/ recorder will enter the playback pause
status at the final still.
Pressing the C button will restore the Disc
Navigation screen.
139
Connecting to PC
THE FOLLOWING ARE AVAILABLE WHEN CONNECTING TO PC
Use the provided PC connection cable to connect this DVD video camera/ recorder to your PC in which
the software on the CD-ROM provided or generally available software is installed: The videos and
photos recorded on the DVD video camera/ recorder can be used on the PC.
●Using, on PC, the photos recorded on DVD-RAM disc or card in this DVD
video camera/recorder:
Original disc
Application used
DVD-RAMdiscorcardrecordedonthis Application on which JPEG files can be used
DVD video camera/recorder
• Open the DCIM\100*HPNX1 folder of DVD-RAM disc or card.
●Viewing, on PC, DVD-RAM disc recorded on this DVD video camera/
recorder:
Original disc
Application used
DVD-RAM disc recorded on this DVD DVD-MovieAlbumSE** or generally available playback software
video camera/recorder
conforming to DVD video recording (DVD-VR) format (see
“Terminology”, P. 160)
Example: PowerDVD XP produced by CyberLink
●Viewing, on PC, DVD-R disc recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder:
Original disc
Application used
DVD-R disc recorded and finalized on Generally available playback software compatible with DVD video
this DVD video camera/recorder
(see “Terminology”, P. 160)
Example: PowerDVD XP produced by CyberLink
●Copying contents on DVD-RAM disc recorded on this DVD video camera/
recorder to another DVD-RAM disc using PC:
Original disc
Written media
Application used
DVD-RAMdiscrecordedon Another DVD-RAM disc
this DVD video camera/
recorder
DVD-MovieAlbum copy tool**
• Copy the data to hard disk of PC, and then write
the data to another DVD-RAM disc.
• Copying in program units is also possible.
140
●Using PC to edit images on DVD-RAM disc recorded on this DVD video
camera/recorder:
Original disc
Written disc
Application used
DVD-RAMdiscrecordedon Original DVD-RAM disc or DVD-MovieAlbumSE**
this DVD video camera/
recorder
another DVD-RAM disc
●Using PC to edit images on DVD-RAM disc recorded on this DVD video
camera/recorder and create a DVD video (DVD-R disc) (see page 152):
Original disc
Written disc
Application used
DVD-RAMdiscrecordedon Blank DVD-R disc
this DVD video camera/
recorder
• DVD-MovieAlbumSE**
• MyDVD**
*
The number may be different when recording was made on a device conforming to DCF.
** Software stored on the provided CD-ROM
Note:
Images recorded on DVD-R disc cannot be edited on the software provided with this DVD video camera/recorder.
Languages compatible with each software program:
• DVD-MovieAlbumSE and UDF driver (DVD-RAM driver) can handle Japanese, English, German,
French, Spanish and Italian.
• 3D-TitleSTUDIO provided with DVD-MovieAlbumSE can handle Japanese and English.
• MyDVD can handle Japanese, English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese (simplified and
traditional), Dutch, Korean, Portuguese, Swedish and Thai.
• When installing the provided software, the language on your Windows® will automatically be
installed: If your Windows® is run on a language other than the above, the English version will be
installed.
141
Contents on Provided CD-ROM
The CD-ROM supplied with the DVD video camera/recorder contains the following folders:
TorefertothecontentsofCD-ROM, settheCD-ROMintheCD-ROMdriveofPC, right-clicktheCD-ROM
icon and choose “Open”.
Contains the DVD-MovieAlbumSE (see page 148 for installation).
You can use DVD-MovieAlbumSE to edit the images recorded on
DVD-RAM disc and create a 3D title.
Contains the MyDVD (see page 150 for installation).
You can use MyDVD to create a DVD-Video disc from movies
edited on DVD-MovieAlbumSE.
Contains the UDF driver (see page 146 for installation).
Install this driver if you wish to use JPEG stills recorded on DVD-
RAM disc, on your PC.
Contains the USB2.0 driver (see page 145 for installation).
Install this driver when using the provided PC connection cable to
connect this DVD video camera/ recorder to PC:Ifthe USBterminal
of your PC is USB1.1, use this driver.
Contains the Acrobat Reader (see page 143 for installation).
IfAcrobat Reader is not installed in your PC,you will need to install
it in order to open the on-line manuals (instruction manual files)for
DVD-MovieAlbumSE and UDF driver.
Although the CD-ROM may contain a folder or file other than the above, they will not be needed on this DVD
video camera/recorder unless some special instruction is given.
142
Read the electronic instruction manuals (on-line manuals) on PC for complete information on using each
software program.
●DVD-MovieAlbumSE
●MyDVD
You can read the instruction manual using either
of the following procedures:
• Open the PDF file in
DVDMASE 3\manuals\Englishfolder
contained on the provided CD-ROM.
• After installing DVD-MovieAlbumSE, open
“Programs”or “All Programs” from the
Windows “Start” menu, choose “Hitachi
DVDCAM” and “DVD-MovieAlbumSE”, and
then open “On-line Manual”.
• After installing MyDVD, open “Programs” or
“All Programs” from the Windows “Start”
menu, choose “Sonic” and “MyDVD”, and then
open the electronic instruction manual in
“Document” folder.
To read the above manual,a Web browser (Internet
Explorer, Netscape Communicator, etc.) must be
set up in your PC.
If you cannot open the electronic instruction
manual of MyDVD, consult the maker of your PC
about the setup method for Web browser.
To read the above manual, you will need Adobe
Acrobat Reader.
If Adobe Acrobat Reader has not been installed in
your PC, start AcrobatReader\English
\AR500ENU.exeon the provided CD-ROM to
install it.
●UDF driver (DVD-RAM driver)
• After installing the UDF driver (DVD-RAM
driver), open “Programs” or “All Programs”
from the Windows “Start” menu, choose “DVD-
RAM” and “DVD-RAM Driver”, and then open
“How to use DVD-RAM disc”.
No electronicinstruction manual is provided with
the USB driver.
●Requirements of available PC
• OS: Windows® 98 Second Edition / Me / 2000 Professional / XP
• Computer: IBM PC/ AT compatible
• CPU: Intel® Pentium® III 450 MHz or higher, Celeron™ 633 MHz or higher (Pentium® 4 1.2 GHz or
higher is recommended)
Operation with Pentium compatible CPU other than those produced by Intel®/ AMD® may not be
supported. Also, operation with K6-2®/ K6-III® produced by AMD® may not be supported.
• Memory: At least 128 MB (256 MB or more is recommended)
• Free space on hard disk: At least 400 MB (does not include capacity needed to copy or edit video or
photo data)
• CD-ROM drive (used to install software)
• Display adapter (video memory of at least 4 MB) and display that can display at least 1024 × 768 pixels
and 65.536 colors (16-bit colors), and is compatible with DirectX® 8.1 or higher.
• DirectSound® compatible sound card
• USB: One unused port is necessary for this product (USB2.0 port is recommended)
Note:
• Operation is not guaranteed in the following cases:
®
- When OS other than Windows 98 Second Edition / Me / 2000 Professional / XP is installed
®
®
®
- When operated on Pentium compatible CPU other than those produced by Intel or AMD
- When connected via USB hub
- When connected using cables other than the provided PC connection cable or mini-USB B connector 5-pin type PC
connection cable (generally available)
- When a USB device other than this DVD video camera/recorder, keyboard or mouse is connected to PC
• Multiprocessor is not supported.
®
®
• Can also be used with Windows 98, but OS of Windows 98 Second Edition or higher is necessary in order to use
all functions of DVD-MovieAlbumSE.
• Even when your PC satisfies the above conditions of available PC, malfunction may result or restriction in use may
occur, depending on the combination of other software in PC or peripheral devices.
143
Installing Software
• Before connecting the DVD video camera/recorder to your PC, you will
need to install the software on provided CD-ROM.
Before You Begin
Before installing the UDF driver (DVD-RAM driver) provided with this DVD video camera/ recorder,
check to see if another UDF driver* has already been installed your PC.
*InstantWrite® provided with the DZ-WINPC1, DZ-WINPC2 or DZ-WINPC2B PC kit for the Hitachi
DZ-MV100A DVD video camera/ recorder, or with the DZ-WINPC3 PC editing kit for the Hitachi DZ-
MV200A, DZ-MV230A or DZ-MV270A DVD video camera/ recorder.
If the UDF driver has been installed, uninstall it and then install the UDF driver on the provided CD-
ROM. Use “Control Panel” –“Add or Remove Programs” or “Add or Remove Applications” to uninstall
the UDF driver.
If any question messages appear that mean “This file is not used on another application. Do you wish
to delete it together?” during uninstalling, click “No” for all such questions.
DISPLAYING INSTALLER SCREEN
1
2
Turn the PC on.
3
4
Use the Windows My Computer or Explorer to
open the drive in which the CD-ROM is located.
Do not connect the DVD video camera/
recorder to PC yet.First, ifany software is being
run on the PC, terminate all the programs being
used.
Double-click the Setup.exe icon.
The “.exe” extension may not appear,
depending on the PC being used.
Insert theprovided CD-ROM into theCD-ROM
drive of PC.
The installer screen will automatically appear.
If the installer screen does not automatically
appear, use the following procedure to display
it:
144
INSTALLING USB DRIVER
With Windows XP
1
2
Click “USB Driver Installation” on the installer
screen.
4
The message on Windows logo test willappear:
Carefully read it and then click “Continue
Anyway”.
The USB driver installer screen will appear:
Click “USB Driver Installation”.
Installation will start.
Click
3
Check the contents and then click “OK”.
Click
5
3
Click “Quit”.
Click
Click
Installing the USB driver is now complete.
With Windows 2000/Me/98 Second Edition
1
2
Click “USB Driver Installation” on the installer
screen.
Click “Quit”.
The USB driver installer screen will appear:
Click “USB Driver Installation”.
Installation will start.
Click
Installing the USB driver is now complete.
Click
145
INSTALLING UDF DRIVER (DVD-RAM DRIVER)
The UDF driver must be installed before using the disc in DVD video camera/ recorder on PC.
1
Click “UDF Driver (DVD-RAM Driver)
Installation” on the installer screen.
4
Carefully read the License Agreement: If you
accept it, click “Yes”.
The installer screen can be displayed using the
procedure in “DISPLAYING INSTALLER
SCREEN” (P. 144).
The contents of agreement displayed on actual
screen may be different from those in the figure.
2
The driver setup screen will appear: Click the
“Driver and Formatter Setup” button.
Click
Click
5
Ifyou do not wish to change the folder in which
the UDF driver is installed, click “Next”.
3
Click “Next”.
Click
Click
146
6
7
8
If you do not wish to change the folder name,
click “Next”.
9
If your PC uses Windows® XP/ 98 Second
Edition/ Me, a message that prompts you to
restart will appear: Click “Finish” and then
restart the PC.
Installing the UDF driver is now complete.
If your PC uses Windows® 2000 Professional,
proceed with step 10.
Confirm
Click
Check the displayed contents, and then click
“Next”.
Confirm
Click
10If your PC uses Windows® 2000 Professional, a
message announcing the start for detecting
device will appear: Click “Finish” to start the
detection of device.
It may take several minutes for PC to detect the
device. When detection of the device is
complete,a message that prompts you to restart
will appear: Click “Yes” to restart the PC.
Installing the UDF driver is now complete.
Click
Installation will start. When installation is
complete, some notes will appear: Check the
contents, and then click “x” at the top right of
window.
The contents displayed on actual screen may be
different from those in the figure.
Click
147
INSTALLING DVD-MovieAlbumSE
Software “DVD-MovieAlbumSE” is used to edit videos that conform to the DVD video recording (DVD-
VR) format, and photos recorded on DVD-RAM disc.
1
2
Click “DVD-MovieAlbumSE Installation” on
the installer screen.
4
Ifyou do not wish to change the folder in which
DVD-MovieAlbumSEis installed,click “Next”.
The installer screen can be displayed using the
procedure described in “DISPLAYING
INSTALLER SCREEN” (P. 144).
The screen for installing DVD-MovieAlbumSE
will appear: Click “Next”.
Click
5
If you do not wish to change the folder name,
click “Next”.
Click
3
Carefully read the License Agreement: If you
accept it, click “Yes”.
Click
Click
148
6
Check the displayed contents, and then click
“Next”.
Installation will start.
Proceed with the installation, following the
instructions on screen.
Click
7
A message verifying whether a shortcut icon is
to be created on desktop will appear: If you
want to create one, click “Yes”.
If not, choose “No”.
Click
8
Choose the restart option, and then click
“Finish”.
Installing DVD-MovieAlbumSE is now
complete.
Click
149
INSTALLING MyDVD
Software “MyDVD” is used to write the images edited on DVD-MovieAlbumSE to DVD-R disc.
1
Click “MyDVD Installation” on the installer
screen.
4
Ifyou do not wish to change the folder in which
MyDVD is installed, click “Next”.
The installer screen can be displayed using the
procedure described in “DISPLAYING
INSTALLER SCREEN” (P. 144).
2
The screen for installing My DVD will appear:
Click “Next”.
Click
5
Check the displayed contents, and then click
“Next”.
Installation will start.
Click
3
Carefully read the Software License
Agreement: If you accept it, click “Yes”.
Click
Click
150
6
Click “Finish” to restart the PC.
Contact the following for information on
MyDVD:
U.S.
Installing MyDVD is now complete.
Phone: 1-877-383-1124
http://support.sonic.com/login/
default.asp
(You will need to perform customer
registration.)
Europe (London)
Phone: 44-20-7437-1100
http://support.sonic.com/login/
default.asp
(You will need to perform customer
registration.)
Click
Sonic Solutions Corporation, which developed
MyDVD, recommends user registration of
MyDVD, in order to offer appropriate support
to customer.The guide for user registration will
appear when you start MyDVD for the first
time,or you can display it any time by accessing
the following URL:
http://www.mydvd.com
(You will need the connection environment to
the Internet for user registration.)
Note:
• If software that detects computer virus, etc., has been
installed, invalidate it.
• If your PC uses Windows XP or 2000 Professional, set
®
the user name to “Administrator (computer’s manager)”
(or user name with equivalent authorization), log on to
PC, and then install the software (if you do not have
authorization, consult your system manager).
151
Creating DVD Video on PC from DVD-RAM Disc
Recorded on DVD Video Camera/Recorder
Using DVD-MovieAlbumSE and MyDVD, you can create a DVD video (DVD-R disc) from the images
recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder, following the procedure below:
1
Insert a recorded DVD-RAM disc into the DVD
video camera/ recorder, and connect the DVD
video camera/ recorder to the USB terminal of
PC.
Note:
• Choose “Divide by Marker” in the “Option” box: Each
scene of program recorded on the DVD video
camera/recorder will be saved as an independent
movie file so that export can be executed at high
speed. If you do not choose “Divide by Marker”,
movie files may be unified and re-encoded, so it may
take time to export them. DVD-MovieAlbumSE may
automatically re-encode a movie recorded in the
XTRA mode containing rapidly moving scenes (8
Mbps or higher), regardless of the “Divide by Maker”
setting,anditmaytakesometimetoexportthemovie
file.
2
3
Start DVD-MovieAlbumSE, and edit the
images on DVD-RAM disc as necessary.
Right-click the thumbnailfrom which you wish
to create a DVD video on the DVD-
MovieAlbumSE screen, and execute “Export”.
• Any disc on which scenes were combined (see page
116) on Disc Navigation of this DVD video camera/
recorder is re-encoded, so it may take time to export
files.
• Re-encodingmaycauseimagequalitytodeteriorate
slightly.
4
The “Program Export” screen, shown below,
will appear: Choose “Same Resolution” and
check “Use DVD-Video” in the “Export Mode”
setting box. Choose “704 × 480
(recommended)” for “Resolution”.
• Do not choose “Simple Export” in the “Export Mode”
setting box: Choosing it may stop export midway.
5
6
Click the Start button to start export.
When export is complete, message “The file
exporting was completed successfully.
Do you wish to create a ‘DVD-Video’ disc or an
‘MPEG file’ disc?” will appear. Check the small
box for “Eject the disc being used”, and then
click “Yes”.
Insert a brand-new DVD-R disc into the DVD
video camera/ recorder.
7
DVD-MovieAlbumSE will automatically end,
and the “Export to Disc” screen will appear:
Click the “Start” button.
“Program Export” Screen
Click
152
8
MyDVD will automatically start. After a few
moments, the exported scene will be
automatically registered on the MyDVD
editing screen:
9
Click the Burn button: Writing to DVD-R disc
will start. When writing is complete, a DVD
video disc will be created.
Then the disc cover of this DVD video camera/
recorder will open automatically.
Now you can change the DVD menu to the
desired style, change the title, etc. on this
editing screen.
Note:
• The menu screen created on MyDVD will not appear on
this DVD video camera/recorder.
Also, depending on the written contents, the images
maynotbeplayableonthisDVDvideocamera/recorder.
In such cases, use a standard DVD player to display the
created menu.
• The following table shows the recordable time on 8 cm
DVD-RdiscfromMyDVD.Therecordabletimeisshorter
than that of 8 cm DVD-RAM disc because MyDVD
always records audio in the LPCM format.
Movie quality mode
Recordable time on 8
of DVD-RAM disc in
cm DVD-R disc
DVD video camera/
(using MyDVD)
recorder
STD
FINE
XTRA
Approx. 40 minutes
Approx. 25 minutes
At least 18 minutes
* If“Style” created on MyDVD is a movie or there
are many thumbnails, the recordable time will
be less than that shown in the above table.
The following discs created on MyDVD cannot be
played back on this DVD video camera/recorder:
•
•
•
Discs containing slide show (*1)
Discs with no audio
Discs with audio longer or shorter than video
*1 Cannot be created on MyDVD depending on
the version.
• “Slide Show” can be created using photo files on
MyDVD, but it will not be playable on this DVD video
camera/recorder.
• A DVD video can be created from MPEG files on PC
using MyDVD, but it may not be playable on this DVD
video camera/recorder.
153
Uninstalling Software
Use the following procedure to uninstall (delete) any provided software that has been installed:
UNINSTALLING USB DRIVER
®
With Windows 98 Second Edition/Me:
1
Set the power switch on DVD video camera/
recorder to “O VIDEO”, and use the PC
connection cable to connect it to the PC.
7
Delete the following files:
Windows® 98 Second Edition:
C:\WINDOWS\INF\OTHER\Hitachi
Ltd.DZ3298.inf
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM\IOSUBSYS\dzmvpd
r.pdr
2
3
Open “System” on Control Panel, and then
choose the “Device Manager” tab.
Delete HITACHI DVD-RAM DZ-MV5 in “CD-
ROM”.
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\DZMVU
MSS.sys
No extension may appear depending on the setting on
PC.
If the file does not exist, proceed with the next
step:
Windows® Me:
C:\WINDOWS\INF\OTHER\Hitachi
Ltd.DZ32me.inf
No extension may appear depending on the setting on
PC.
4
5
Delete HITACHIDVD-RAM DZ-MV5in “Disk
drives”.
If the file does not exist, proceed with the next
step:
If the INF folder cannot be found, use Explorer
to choose the “View” menu, “Folder Options”,
“View” tab, and then “Show all files”: Click
“OK” and then try again.
Delete the following items in “Universal Serial
Bus controllers”:
8
Disconnect the DVD video camera/ recorder
from PC, and then restart the PC.
Hitachi DVDCAM DVD Mode USB HS
Interface
USB Mass Storage Device For DVDCAM
If no item exists, proceed with the next step:
Close Device Manager.
6
If the message for restart appears, click “No”.
154
®
With Windows 2000 Professional/XP:
1
Set the power switch on DVD video camera/
recorder to “O VIDEO”, and use the PC
connection cable to connect it to the PC.
8
Use application software “Notepad” provided
with Windows® to open the oem*.inf files (*
represents a number) from the file with the
higher number. Search for the files with the
following entry on the second and third lines,
and then delete them:
2
Open “System” on Control Panel, and then
click “Device Manager” under the “Hardware”
tab.
;Hitachi DVDCAM USB Driver Installation
File
3
4
Delete HITACHI DVD-RAM DZ-MV5 USB
Device in “DVD/ CD-ROM drive”.
;Support OS: Windows® 2000 Professional
and Windows® XP
If your PC uses Windows® 2000 Professional,
delete HITACHI DVD-RAM DZ-MV5 USB
Device in “Disk drives”.
Extension “.inf” may not appear, depending on
the setting of PC.
If your PC uses Windows®, or the file cannot be
found, proceed with the next step:
9
Also delete the oem*.PNF files with the same
numbers as those of the files deleted in step 8.
5
Delete Hitachi DVDCAM DVD Mode USB HS
Interface in “USB (Universal Serial Bus)
controllers”.
10Disconnect the DVD video camera/ recorder
from PC, and then restart the PC.
If the item cannot be found, proceed with the
next step:
6
7
Close Device Manager.
If the message for restart appears, click “No”.
If your PC uses Windows® 2000 Professional,
open the C:\WINNT\INFfolder.
If your PC uses Windows® XP, open the
C:\WINDOWS\INFfolder.
If the INF folder cannot be found, use Explorer
to choose the “Tools” menu, “Folder Options”,
“View” tab, and then “Show all files and
folders”: Click “OK” and then try again.
DELETING OTHER APPLICATIONS
To uninstall the other applications, use “Control Panel” to open “Add or Remove Applications”, choose
the applications to be uninstalled from the displayed list of applications, and then click the “Change/
Remove” button.
Note:
After uninstalling software, be sure to restart the PC.
155
Cautions When Using DVD Video Camera/
Recorder by Connecting It to PC
Note:
®
• Do not use Windows application to finalize a DVD-R
disc recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder: The
disc will not be recognizable on the DVD video camera/
recorder.
®
• When formatting a DVD-RAM disc on Windows , use
theUDF2.01format(2.0if2.01cannotbeselected)(see
“Terminology” on page 160). Formatting with other
standards could cause the DVD video camera/recorder
to malfunction.
• Before processing or editing photos, be sure to copy the
JPEG files in 100HPNX1 folder to the hard disk of PC.
• OrdinarydataonPCcanusuallybewrittentoDVD-RAM
discinthisDVDvideocamera/recorder,butHitachidoes
not guaranteed the operation.
• If the PC is started from suspend (see “Terminology” on
page 160) (or sleep or standby) with this DVD video
camera/recorder connected to the PC, the DVD video
camera/recorder may not be recognized: Disconnect
the DVD video camera/recorder from PC once, and
restart the PC.
• Multiple DVD video camera/recorders cannot be
simultaneously connected to PC.
• Use a reference of approx. 30 minutes at approx. 86°F
(30°C) or less for operation when connecting this DVD
video camera/recorder to PC.
- Use a reference of a continuous 30 minutes or less for
write operation when using the DVD-MovieAlbum
copy tool provided with DVD-MovieAlbumSE.
- If the temperature of this DVD video camera/recorder
is too high, writing or reading on this DVD video
camera/recorder may be faulty. And in particular, note
that,ifanerroroccursduringwritingtoDVD-Rdisc,the
disc will not be usable. Take care that the temperature
of this DVD video camera/recorder is not too high.
156
Subsidiary Information
Introduction to Optional Accessories
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
Wide conversion lens (DZ-WL1)* Tele-conversion lens (DZ-TL1)*
Video flash (DZ-FLH3)**
•
*
When using camera accessories, be sure to read the instruction manuals for each accessory.
Whenattachingthewideortele-conversionlenstothisDVDvideocamera/recorder, besuretoremovethelenshood
at the end of the lens (see P. 57).
** Unusable on DZ-MV550A.
POWER SUPPLY
Battery (DZ-BP14SW)
INFORMATION ON SQUARE ADAPTER
This DVD video camera/ recorder cannot use a square adapter, such as for 8 cm DVD-RAM disc (DRMS-
V28R), 8 cm DVD-R disc (DR30.1P): Remove the disc from square adapter and set it in the Round DVD
Holder of the provided DVD-RAM disc, referring to page 82.
●Removing disc from square adapter
(Example 1)
Snap off and
remove lock pin
(Example 2)
Slide the disc obliquely upward
so that it is not caught by claws.
Note:
Refer to page 81, 82 if you want to correctly set the removed disc in Round DVD Holder that can be used in this DVD
video camera/recorder.
157
Cleaning
Be sure to set the power switch to “POWER OFF” before cleaning this DVD video camera/recorder.
●Cleaning LCD screen and camera
lens
Use dry, soft cloth to wipe dirt off. When cleaning
the LCD screen, be careful not to use force, scratch
it, or subject it to impact: Doing such could cause
a defect in the screen,result in display unevenness,
or damage the LCD monitor.
●Do not use benzene or thinner to
clean DVD video camera/recorder
case
The coating of case could peel off or the case could
deteriorate. Wipe off dirt on the case with a moist
cloth which hasbeen completely wrung out.When
using chemical cleaning cloth, follow instructions
for use.
●If dust adheres to the viewfinder
lens,removeitusingacottonswab,
etc.
Do not rub the lens with force: Doing so could
scratch the lens.
158
Changing Setting of Demonstration
This DVD video camera/recorder has versatile functions, including special effects.
Referringtotheprocedureonpage 43,connecttheDVDvideocamera/recorder,ACadapter/chargerand
power cable to power the DVD video camera/recorder from AC outlet.
1
2
Press the MENU button.
Note:
• You can press the DISC NAVIGATION button to stop
demonstration midway: The Disc Navigation screen will
appear.
Choose “Initial Setup”,
“Demo Mode”, and then
press the A button.
I n i
t
i
a l S e t u p
Beep
• If you choose “Auto”, the demonstration will not start if a
disc is loaded with the power switch set to “OVIDEO” or
“N PHOTO”, or a card is loaded with the power switch
set to “P PHOTO”.
• The demonstration function will not work when the DVD
video camera/recorder is connected to PC.
• While the demonstration is being given, the recording
indicator will blink.
Power Save
Re c o r d LED
Language
Demo Mode
Reset
A u t o
O f f
S t a r t
3
Use the joystick to
choose the desired
option, and then press
the A button.
ENTER
RETURN
RAM
Auto: To start demonstration approx. 3
minutes after turning the DVD video
camera/ recorder on.
Off:
To set demonstration to off.
Start: To start demonstration immediately.
Press the MENU button again:The menu screen
will disappear.
To stop the demonstration midway, press the C
button.
The demo mode will end when the DVD video
camera/ recorder is turned off or the DISC
EJECT button is pressed down.
159
Terminology
DISC-PROTECT:
This disables writing to disc (protects disc from writing) so that images recorded on DVD-RAM disc
cannot be accidentally deleted and the disc cannot be initialized.
DVD PLAYER:
This device can play back video and audio signals recorded on DVD-Video and DVD-R discs using the
DVD video format. Most DVD players can play back a DVD-R disc recorded on the DVD video camera/
recorder (some DVD players cannot play back the disc).
DVD-RAM DISC:
Rewritable DVD disc.
DVD-R DISC:
One-time recordable DVD disc.
DVD VIDEO FORMAT:
This application format establishes the file name, directory structure, data format, etc. to record videos
(movies). A generally available DVD video conforms to this format.
DVD VIDEO RECORDER:
This device can record video and audio on any recordable DVD disc, such as DVD-RAM, that conforms
to the DVD video recording format. Some DVD video recorders can record on a DVD-R disc conforming
to DVD video format. A DVD video recorder that is compatible with 8 cm DVD-RAM can play back
DVD-RAM discs recorded on the DVD video camera/ recorder.
DVD VIDEO RECORDING (DVD-VR) FORMAT:
Format to record video data on writable DVD disc:This format has been adopted for DVD video camera/
recorders, and DVD-RAM recorders that are compatible with DVD-RAM disc, etc.
160
FINALIZE:
This process makes a DVD-R disc recorded on this DVD video camera/ recorder playable on a DVD
player, etc. that conforms to 8 cm DVD-R: No further recording can be made on a finalized DVD-R disc.
HOWLING:
This phenomenon occurs as follows: When the DVD video camera/ recorder is connected to a device,
such as TV, the audio input to the microphone of DVD video camera/ recorder is amplified and output
from the speakers of TV, and the signal is again input to the microphone: This is repeated to form an
endless loop of audio signal, and the signal is amplified up to the audio output amplitude limit of the
device. Howling can be prevented by changing the positional relationship between the DVD video
camera/ recorder and TV, or by turning down the volume on TV.
INFRARED SENSOR:
This sensor is used to adjust the white balance.
LASER PICKUP BLOCK:
This block emits laser beam to a disc, and then collects the laser beam reflected from the disc to convert
it to an electric signal. The block consists of a laser, lens, receiving element, etc.
LINEAR PCM:
Audio recording format similar to MPEG audio layer 2: However, linear PCM does not compress an
audio signal, but instead samples it and converts it to a digital signal to be recorded. Therefore, the
amount of data used is larger than that of MPEG audio layer 2.
MultiMediaCard:
This is a standard of memory card developed in 1997. The card is 32 mm long x 24 mm wide x 1.4 mm
thick, and has 7 pins. It can be inserted into SD memory card slot and used.
SCENE:
Video (movie): “One scene” refers to images recorded from one press of REC button until recording is
stopped by pressing the REC button again.
Photo (still): “One scene” refers to a single photo recording by pressing the REC button.
161
SD MEMORY CARD:
This is a standard of memory card developed in 1999. The card is 32 mm long x 24 mm wide x 2.1 mm
thick, and has 9 pins. Since the SD memory card was developed based on MultiMediaCard (MMC),
MMC can be inserted into SD memory card slot and used. However, an SD memory card cannot be
inserted in the slot exclusively for MMC.
SLOT-IN TYPE PC:
PC that has a DVD drive into/ from which a DVD is directly inserted or ejected without using a tray.
SUSPENDING PC:
This function stores the status of PC before it is turned off: It will restart the work from the status
immediately before PC was turned off, when the PC is turned on next time.
THUMBNAIL:
This refers to a reduced screen displayed on Disc Navigation in order to identify the recorded image
contents.
UDF2.01 FORMAT:
UDF stands for Universal Disc Format: This is a world standard file format for optical storage defined
by OSTA*. UDF revision 2.0 or 2.01 has been adopted for DVD-RAM disc to ensure compatibility with
DVD video recorders and PCs, as well as DVD video camera/ recorders.
* Optional Storage Technology Association: An organization that is promoting writable optical storage.
VIDEO SELECTOR:
This device can input multiple audio and video signals, and select the desired audio and video signals
among those input, to output them.
162
No DVD Video Camera/Recorder Operation -
Check the Following:
Check 1 No movie can be recorded
Skip or search playback does
not work well
Check 3
Movie can be recorded only on DVD-RAM or DVD-R
disc.
Check the following:
If the temperature inside the DVD video camera/
recorder is high, normal operation may not be
possible. Turn the DVD video camera/recorder off,
wait for a few moments, and then turn it on again for
operation.
• Is DVD-RAM or DVD-R disc inserted?
• Is power switch set to “O VIDEO”?
• Is the DVD-RAM disc in DVD video camera/
recorder write-protected? Release the write-
protect.
• Does disc have remaining recording space?
If movie still cannot be recorded after the above
check is clear, the disc may be damaged: Use
another disc.
• No operation can be
performed because the
ACCESS/PC or CARD
ACCESS indicator on this
DVD video camera/recorder
remains lit or blinking.
Check 4
• Afterdiscorcardisinserted,it
takes some time until
recording is possible.
Check 2 No still can be recorded
Still can be recorded only on DVD-RAM disc, SD
memory card or MultiMediaCard.
Check the following:
• Is DVD-RAM disc, SD memory card or
MultiMediaCard inserted?
• Is power switch set to match the recording
medium?
− When using DVD-RAM disc:
In the following cases, it will take more time than
usual until operation is possible:
• When disc or card is removed and then reinserted
• Whendatechanges(e.g.,duringthefirstrecording
of the day)
• When the temperature is greatly different from the
status of previous recording
• When disc with scratches, dirt or fingerprints is
inserted
• When disc is subject to severe vibrations
• When the battery or DC power cord was
disconnected instead of following the correct
procedure using power switch to turn the DVD
video camera/recorder off
Set to “N PHOTO”.
If the LOCK switch on this DVD video camera/
recorder is set to (to left), set it to (to right).
If the LOCK switch is set to (to left), switching
to “N PHOTO” is not possible.
− When using SD memory or MultiMediaCard:
Set to “P PHOTO”.
• Is loaded DVD-RAM disc write-protected?
• When using SD memory card: Is the erase
prevention switch locked? (P.28)
• Does disc or card have remaining recording
space?
If still cannot be recorded after the above check is
clear, thediscorcardmaybedamaged:Useanother
disc or card.
163
No DVD video camera/recorder
operation
No image appears on the LCD
screen or in the viewfinder
Check 5
Check 7
Is a fully charged battery attached?
Is the DVD video camera/recorder powered from AC
outlet?
• Is DVD video camera/recorder connected to PC
using PC connection cable?
Unplug the PC connection cable.
• Does DVD video camera/recorder stop at the end
of the scene to which wipe-out was set and played
back?
Check 6 No image in viewfinder
Is LCD monitor open?
Press the DISC NAVIGATION button.
No image will appear in viewfinder unless the LCD
monitor is closed and securely locked to DVD video
camera/recorder.
164
Trouble Messages
A message may appear while you are operating the DVD video camera/recorder. If a message appears,
refer to the following table and take appropriate corrective action.
Messages are arranged in alphabetical order.
Reference
page
Message
Cause & Troubleshooting
(1) Data error in a part of Itispossiblethatthesystemcannotnormallycompletewritingoffile
image file. Repair data when power is turned off for some reason during recording or
now?
editing(deleting,dividingorcombiningscenes,orcreatingplaylist).
(2) Found error in image Selecting “YES” will automatically repair the video file, but even if
file. Repair data now?
(3) Data error in all
image file. Repair all
data now?
“NO” is selected, the same message will appear when the DVD
video camera/recorder is turned on next time. (Do not remove the
discwhiletheDVDvideocamera/recorderisrecognizingit:Ignoring
this will deactivate the file repair function.)
Follow the instructions on screen, taking note of the following
cautions:
• Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger to power the DVD video
camera/recorder when repairing data: Repair is not possible
using a battery. If a battery has been attached, turn the power
switch off once, connect the AC adapter/charger, and then start
repairing.
• Data may not be repaired, depending on the timing when power
was turned off.
• Data may not be repaired normally if data recorded on another
recorder is mixed in.
• The repaired data may be different from the original recorded
content because of partial deletion of defective portion.
• Since the date/time for repair is added to the repaired data (only
the corrected portion for partial repair), the original date/time
information will be lost.
• Since all movies, and then all stills, are repaired, the order of
recorded contents will be lost.
(In case of message (2) (3) only)
• See *1 on page 171.
(1)Discisnotformatted. DVD-R disc that was not initialized for camera use was inserted.
If it formats, it becomes
possible to use for
camera.
(2) However, when you
record from PC
45
connection terminal,
please do not format.
(3)Formatthediscnow?
165
Reference
page
Message
Cause & Troubleshooting
(1) Error has occurred. • Errorhasoccurred. TrytorestarttheDVDvideocamera/recorder
Please restart.
using the following methods:
(1)Turn power off, removethe battery or AC adapter/chargerand
reattach it, and then turn power on again.
(2) Turn power off, and reinsert the disc. Then turn power on
again.
(2) Error has occurred.
Please reinsert a disc.
(3) Error has occurred.
Error code No. xxxx.
Please read the manual.
(3) See *3 on page 171.
8, 40, 43, 44
(4) If you have another disc available, check to see if any problem
occurs with the disc. If another disc can be used normally, the
original disc may be defective: Contact the disc manufacturer.
If the above procedures cannot solve the problem, take note
of the error number, and contact your dealer.
(4) ERROR xxxx
(5) DISK xxxx
Reference: “Error Code 2881” shows that the disc cannot be
recognized properly.
Battery is almost empty. Replace with a charged battery, or use AC adapter/charger to
Replace it. power the DVD video camera/recorder.
39, 43
116
Cannot combine scene. Unlessconsecutivescenesareselected,theycannotbecombined.
Cannot combine.
Deselect PHOTO
scenes.
Select only movies and combine them.
116
116
116
Cannot combine. Select Select a range of at least 2 scenes to be combined, and then
multiple scenes. combine them.
Cannot delete scenes. Thismayoccurwhenscenethatwaseditedfordivision, etc. istobe
deleted.
Combine the divided scenes, and then delete them.
Cannot execute.
Change display
category to ALL.
Thismessagewillappearifyouattempttocombineormovescenes
with “Category: VIDEO or PHOTO” specified.
138
108
25
Cannot execute.
Unselect multiple
scenes.
Division or change in thumbnail was executed when multiple
scenes were selected.
CANNOT RECORD
PHOTOS
Are you using DVD-R disc? You cannot record still image on DVD-
R disc (recordable of still images from PC). Use DVD-RAM disc to
record still images.
Cannot replace
thumbnail on PHOTO
scenes.
The thumbnail of a still cannot be changed.
Select a movie.
113
Cannot select any more The maximum number of selectable scenes is 999.
scenes.
121
CARD ALMOST FULL Remaining space is only enough to record less than 10 stills.
Delete unnecessary stills and try the card, or use another card.
30, 111
Carderrorhasoccurred. Was the card formatted on PC? Was formatting interrupted
Format the card now?
midway? When using the card on this DVD video camera/recorder,
choose “YES” and format it.
135
28
Carderrorhasoccurred. The card may be damaged: Use another card.
Formatting is not
complete.
166
Reference
page
Message
Card error.
Cause & Troubleshooting
• The card terminals may be dirty: Wipe off dirt, and try the card
again, or use another card.
28
• Data other than still image may be included: Use another card.
Carderrorhasoccurred. Carderrorcouldhaveoccurredduringeditingofscenes.Turnoffthe
Keep card inside &
restart.
DVD video camera/recorder with the card being used inside,
connect the AC adapter/charger, and then power the DVD video
camera/recorder again. Repair of scenes will be attempted.
43, 48
Card full.
Delete unnecessary stills and try the card, or use another card.
30, 111
No more recording on this card can be done: Delete unnecessary
stills or use another card.
Card full.
Cannot execute.
Delete unnecessary stills and try the card, or use another card.
30, 111
Card has no data.
This message will appear when an attempt is made to execute
playback or editing on Disc Navigation with no scene recorded.
Card is not formatted.
Format the card now?
Was the card formatted on PC? When using the card on this DVD
video camera/recorder, choose “YES” and format it.
135
Control Information
Error.
Mismatch may occur between the recorded image and scene
information.
136
Update the control information.
• Use another disc.
• See *3 on page 171.
25, 82
COPY PROTECTED
DISC ACCESS
The video signal input to this DVD video camera/recorder may be
copy-guarded.
Some prerecorded video materials, such as movies, are guarded
against copying.
Copy-guarded materials cannot be recorded on this DVD video
camera/recorder.
83
49, 50
The recorded scene is being stored on disc.
Wait until the message disappears, and you can start to use the
DVD video camera/recorder.
This DVD video camera/recorder is verifying whether the correct
disc has been inserted.
Wait until the message disappears, and you can start to use the
DVD video camera/recorder.
This message will be displayed for a little longer when the date
changes.
DISC ALMOST FULL
The disc will soon be full, and recording will be impossible.
Delete unnecessary scenes and try the disc again, or use another
disc.
29, 111
137
Disc error has occurred. • Disc error occurred during finalizing, and finalizing failed.
Finalizing is not
complete.
Replace the disc.
• See *3 on page 171.
Disc error has occurred. • Has the disc been initialized on PC? Has initializing the disc on
Format the disc now?
PC been interrupted?
Choose “YES” and initialize the disc when using it on this DVD
videocamera/recorder. Initializingthediscwillerasealldataonit.
• See *2 on page 171.
135
167
Reference
page
Message
Cause & Troubleshooting
Disc error has occurred. The disc may be dirty.
Formatting is not
complete.
Remove the disc and wipe off fingerprints, dust, etc. before reusing
it, or use another disc.
82, 135
This message may also appear if you insert a disc for which
formatting was interrupted midway. In this case, use another disc.
Disc error has occurred. Disc error could have occurred during editing of scenes.
Keep disc inside &
restart.
Turn off the DVD video camera/recorder with the disc being used in
it, connect AC adapter/charger, and then power the DVD video
camera/recorder again. Repair of scenes will be tried.
43
25, 82
135
Disc error.
• Use another disc.
• See *3 on page 171.
• Mismatch in recording information may be caused by editing
doneonsomedeviceotherthanthisDVDvideocamera/recorder.
Initialize the disc or use another disc.
• Initializing the disc will erase all data on it.
“DISCERROR”appears Ifyouhavewrite-protectedadiscusingthewrite-protectsettingtool
when an attempt to (WPTOOL) that is equipped with the UDF driver contained on the
release write-protect is CD-ROM provided with this DVD video camera/recorder, you
made.
cannot release the write-protect on this DVD video camera/
recorderasis.Usethewrite-protectsettingtoolonPCtoreleasethe
write-protect.
Disc full. Cannot
execute.
Delete unnecessary scenes before using this disc, or use another
disc.
111
Disc has no data.
This message will appear when an attempt is made to execute
playback or editing on Disc Navigation with no scene recorded.
Disc has no Play List.
Switching of play list was selected with no play list stored.
127
Disc includes protected The disc may be software protected from a device other than this
scenes. Delete scenes? DVD videocamera/recorder. Torelease thiscase, use adevicethat
has executed software-protect.
Disc is full. Cannot add The number of entered scenes has reached the limit that can be
control info.
entered, so the control information for generating thumbnails
cannot be added.
111, 116
Combine several scenes or delete them.
Disc is not formatted.
Format the disc now?
• Has the disc been initialized on a PC?
Choose “YES” and initialize the disc when using it on this DVD
video camera/recorder. Initialization will delete all data on the disc.
• See *2 on page 171.
135
DPOF is not set to a
scene.
Thismessagewillappearwhen“SlideShow:DPOF”isspecifiedfor
the card to which DPOF was not set.
139
120
DPOF scenes over limit. The maximum number of scenes for which DPOF can be set is 999.
Cannot set DPOF
scenes.
Drive overheat. Please ThetemperatureinsidetheDVDvideocamera/recorderistoohigh,
retry later.
and reading or writing of the data on disc may not be performed
normally.
48
Turn the DVD video camera/recorder off and wait for a while. The
temperature will be effectively decreased if the DVD video camera/
recorder is placed in a well-ventilated spot.
168
Reference
page
Message
Cause & Troubleshooting
DVD-R Disc, Video
mode cannot be
changed.
With DVD-R disc, the movie quality mode once used for recording
cannot be changed.
29
END OF DISC
The disc is full.
You cannot record on this disc anymore. Prepare another disc or
delete unnecessary movie scenes from this disc.
29
End scene cannot be
divided.
Division is not possible at the end of scene.
117
Error occurred. Please • AbnormalityhasoccurredwiththeDVD-RAMdisctoberepaired.
replace disc or format
disc.
Initialize the disc before using it, or use the another disc.
Initializing the disc will erase all data on it.
• See *2 on page 171.
135
Error occurred. Please AnabnormalityoccurredwithaDVD-Rdisctoberepaired. Replace
137
28
replace disc.
the disc.
Finalize may not be
Instantaneous shutoff occurred during finalizing, after which power
complete.Finalizeagain was supplied and disc was inserted.
now?
Itisunrecordable onthis The inserted card cannot be used in this DVD video camera/
card.
recorder: Use another card.
JPEG file related to
scenes are not found.
This message will appear when stills recorded on DVD-RAM disc
usingadeviceotherthanthisDVDvideocamera/recorderaretobe
copied to card.
No card.
Insert a card.
47
47
No card.
Please insert card.
No card is inserted.
Insert a card.
NO DISC
ThismessagemayappearwhentheDVDvideocamera/recorderor
disc is moved from a cold place to a warm place.
Condensation has occurred on the camera/recorder lens or DVD-
RAM drive. Do not remove the disc; leave the DVD video camera/
recorder turned off in a place as dry as possible for 1-2 hours.
8
The disc has not been inserted.
Insert it.
44
No more scenes. Play
List was deleted.
• All scenes are deleted from the play list.
• Since a play list with no scenes cannot be supported by
specifications, a play list from which all registered scenes have
been deselected will be deleted.
129, 130
Photo cannot be
divided.
Still image cannot be divided.
117
126
PlayLists over limit.
An attempt was made to create new play list or copy play list, even
though limit specified for play lists in the video recording standard
had already been stored.
Same scenes on Play
List will be deleted.
Delete scenes?
• This will appear when scenes are to be deleted.
• When a play list exists on disc, an attempt to delete scenes in
programwilldisplaythismessage. (Thismessagewillnotappear
if you deselect scenes from play list.)
111
169
Reference
page
Message
Cause & Troubleshooting
Scenes over limit.
Cannot add scene.
The number of scenes entered in play list has reached the limit that
can be entered.
Delete several scenes.
126, 130
117, 126
Scenes over limit.
Cannot divide scene.
The number of entered scenes has reached the limit that can be
entered.
Delete several scenes.
Scenes over limit.
Cannot move scene.
This message will appear if you try to move a scene when the
number of scenes has already reached the registrable limit.
114, 126
Stop processing
The button was pressed to stop processing of multiple scenes.
There was no scene
which can be deleted.
ThismessagewillappearifyoutrytodeletemultiplescenesonDisc
Navigation when all the selected scenes have been locked.
Release the lock on scenes before executing deletion.
111, 119
28
This card cannot be
used.
The card cannot be used in this DVD video camera/recorder: Use
another card.
Please replace card.
This disc cannot be
used. Please replace
disc.
A disc that cannot be used on this DVD video camera/recorder has
been loaded. Check the type of disc.
26
This disc is recorded by This DVD video camera/recorder can use only discs recorded on
the PAL system. Please the NTSC system. A disc recorded on the PAL system cannot be
replace disc.
used on this DVD video camera/recorder.
Top scene cannot be
divided.
Division is not possible at the start of scene.
117
UNFORMAT DISC
The disc is not initialized or it is damaged.
If this message appears, be sure to initialize the disc on this DVD
video camera/recorder before using it.
Reinitializing even a disc used on this DVD video camera/recorder
may be necessary (initializing will erase all recorded contents on
disc). If this message appears, try to initialize the disc. If the same
messagestillappears, thediscmaybedamaged:Useanotherdisc.
135
See *2 on page 171.
82
Use AC adapter/
charger.
FinalizationisnotpossiblewhentheDVDvideocamera/recorderis
powered by a battery: Use the AC adapter/charger for finalization.
43, 137
Use AC adapter/
charger.
Scene cannot be repaired when the DVD video camera/recorder is
powered by a battery.
Turn off power.
IftheACadapter/charger is unavailable in handy place, remove the
disc, use the opposite side, or use another disc. To repair the
removed disc, insert the disc into the DVD video camera/recorder
afterwards, and connect the AC adapter/charger.
43
VIDEOscene cannotbe No movie can be copied to card.
118
copied to card.
Select stills and copy them to card.
Write protected.
Check card.
• A locked card or write-protected disc is inserted.
• Release the lock or write-protect using the Card or Disc
Navigation menu.
28, 134
Write protected.
Check disc.
170
*1
• This message may also appear when dirt adheres to disc. If this message appears when a recorded disc
is recognized immediately after it is inserted, do not repair the disc; remove it and then use a soft, dry
cloth to clean off the dirt before using it.
• This message may also appear when condensation occurs. In this case, do not repair the disc; turn the
DVD video camera/ recorder off, wait until it dries out, and then turn it on again.
• If the repair message appears when you turn the DVD video camera/ recorder on from off with a disc
loaded after recording on it, choose repair.
• If the repair message appears when recording and playback are normally possible with another disc -
and no condensation occurs and the disc is not dirty - choose repair.
*2
• This message may also appear when dirt adheres to disc. In this case, do not initialize the disc; remove
it and then use a soft, dry cloth to clean the dirt before using it.
• This message may also appear when condensation occurs. In this case, do not initialize the disc; turn
the DVD video camera/ recorder off, wait until it dries out, and then turn it on again.
• Initialization will delete all data on disc.
*3
• This message may also appear when dirt adheres to disc. Remove the discand then use a soft, dry cloth
to clean the dirt before using it.
• This message may also appear when condensation occurs. Wait until the DVD video camera/ recorder
dries out, and then turn it on again.
• This message will appear when a single-sided disc is inserted in reverse. Reinsert the disc correctly.
(Insert the disc with the label printed surface facing the outside.)
171
Troubleshooting
Checktoseethefollowingbeforeaskingforarepair. IfthesuggestedsolutionstillcannotrestoretheDVD
video camera/recorder to normal, do not attempt to repair it yourself, but consult your dealer.
Power supplies
Reference
page
Symptom
Cause and Correction
Battery cannot be
charged.
Is the ambient temperature too low or too high?
Charge the battery at 50-86°F (10-30°C).
Is the battery abnormally hot?
Remove the battery, leave it for a while to cool down, then charge it.
Is the DC power cord connected to AC adapter/charger? Unplug it.
39
Has the battery been unused for a long time?
Remove the battery, and then reattach it. If the battery is still not
charged, it may be dead: Purchase a new one.
* If the battery does not charge after you try the above four
procedures, it may be dead: Purchase a new battery.
Battery weakens fast
Are you using the DVD video camera/recorder where the
temperature is low?
A fully charged battery (DZ-BP14S or DZ-BP14SW) may be
discharged sooner than usual at low temperatures. Keep extra
batteries on hand.
41
42
Battery may be dead.
The performance of battery will deteriorate if it is used for an
extended period of time or frequently: Purchase a new battery.
The CHARGE indicator Is the ambient temperature too low or too high?
onACadapter/chargeris Charge the battery in environment where the temperature is 50-
blinking.
86°F (10-30°C).
The battery has possibly discharged excessively. Continue
charging: After a while, the battery will be charged to the specified
voltage, and the CHARGE indicator will light. Then the battery
charge will be completed normally.
39
39
Power turns off
Is battery charged?
immediately after being Charge it.
turned on.
When power is turned
on, the LCD screen will
turn on and off.
Power goes off
unexpectedly.
Is Power Save set to “On”?
If the powered DVD video camera/recorder is left for as long as 5
minutes without recording or playback with “Power Save: On”
specified, it will automatically turn off to save battery power. To
restartrecordinginthiscase,setthepowerswitchto“POWEROFF”
andthensetitto“O VIDEO”. Youcanalsospecify“PowerSave:Off”
to stop automatic power off.
102
Power cannot be turned Detach the battery or AC adapter/charger once, and then press the
off.
RESET button of DVD video camera/recorder: Reattach a power
supply to DVD video camera/recorder before turning it on again.
172
During recording
Symptom
Reference
page
Cause and Correction
Pressing the REC button Is input image copy-guarded?
will not start recording. Is the disc write-protected or the card locked?
28, 84, 134,
163
Recording starts but
stops immediately.
Is disc scratched or does dirt or fingerprint adhere to it?
Clean the disc. If there is still no improvement, replace the disc.
82
83
Is some other AV device directly connected to the video/audio input/
output jack of this DVD video camera/recorder?
If the AV device is connected via several other devices, such as AV
selector, thevideo signal may not be transmitted incorrectly. In such
acase,reducethenumberofdevicesthroughwhichthevideosignal
is transmitted, or connect AV device directly.
Are you attempting to record image from video game or PC?
From some video games or PCs, image cannot be recorded on this
DVD video camera/recorder.
83
101
36, 48
72
LCD screen is hard to
see.
Has brightness of LCD screen been adjusted?
Stop recording and adjust the brightness.
Is the DVD video camera/recorder being used outdoors?
Usetheviewfinder.WhenusingLCDmonitor,adjustitsanglesothat
LCD screen is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Focus is not correct.
Is it difficult to use auto focus with your subject?
Focus manually.
Does “MF” appear?
The DVD video camera/recorder is set to manual focus. Focus the
subject manually, or release manual focus.
71
Is the diopter control correctly adjusted if you are using the
viewfinder as a monitor?
Adjust the diopter control.
34
48
In cases other than the above, set the power switch to “POWER
OFF”, and then set it to “O VIDEO”, “N PHOTO” or “P PHOTO”
again.
173
During playback
Reference
page
Symptom
Cause and Correction
Recognition of disc is not Is disc dirty?
82
complete
Use soft, dry cloth to clean it.
Pressing the playback
button will not start
playback.
Has the image been recorded by devices other than this DVD video
camera/recorder?
Playback of image recorded on devices other than this DVD video
camera/recorder may be impossible on this DVD video camera/
recorder.
136
Has scene been edited on a device other than this DVD video
camera/recorder?
If a scene recorded on this DVD video camera/recorder is edited on
a device other than this DVD video camera/recorder, playback may
not be possible on this DVD video camera/recorder.
No playback picture
Is TV input selector set correctly?
appears on TV screen.
Some TVs have multiple video input jacks. Check whether the
correctinputwasselectedonTVtomatchtheconnectedjacks.Ifthe
DVD video camera/recorder is connected to VCR, set its input
selector to “external input (LINE)”.
78
Is the DVD video camera/recorder connected to TV correctly?
Check the connections.
77
82
Playback picture is
Is disc scratched or does dirt or fingerprint adhere to it?
momentarily interrupted. Clean the disc.
Poor playback picture Was the image input from analog VCR (VHS, 8 mm) and recorded?
The problem may be improved if a VCR equipped with TBC circuit
is used for playback.
Playback picture is greatly Was recording of external input made with “Frame” specified?
98
78
distorted.
Specify “Field” for “PHOTO Input” in record mode settings.
No sound
Is the TV volume control set correctly?
Adjust TV volume control, and be sure to adjust the volume on TV.
Disc Navigation
Was the image recorded from AV input/output jack with
thumbnails do not appear. interference?
Record image with no noise or disturbance.
174
Reference
page
Symptom
Cause and Correction
Photos on card cannot be This DVD video camera/recorder can play back image data
played back.
recorded on SD memory card in other digital cameras conforming
to the DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) standard. The
range of image data normally playable on this DVD video camera/
recorder is that with pixels from 80 horizontal x 60 vertical to 4000
horizontal x 3000vertical. If the pixel data is outside thisrange, blue
thumbnails will appear (thumbnails* in the figure), meaning the
image is unplayable.
Al
l
scenes
1/ 6
PLAY
Fig. 1
*
Evenwhen thenumberof pixelsiswithintheaboverange, playback
maynotbepossible,dependingontherecordingstatusofthedigital
cameras used.
DCF(DesignruleforCameraFilesystem)isanintegratedimagefile
format of digital cameras: Image files can be used on all digital
devices conforming to DCF.
It will take some time to
play back photos on card. number of pixels will take some time to appear.
When playing back a still, “Playback.” will appear: Stills with a large
175
When the DVD video camera/recorder is connected to PC:
Reference
page
Symptom
Cause and Correction
No drive icon appears on The DVD video camera/recorder is not turned on.
48
PC.
Check the power supply.
Driver is not properly recognized.
Turn PC off and on again. If the drive icon still does not appear, use
“Refresh driver” in Device Manager to reinstall the driver.
Turn PC off and then disconnect the PC connection cable. Turn PC
on again, and then use the PC connection cable to connectthe DVD
video camera/recorder to PC.
Make sure the PC connection cable is completely plugged into this
DVD video camera/recorder.
®
If a yellow “!” mark is attached to some device in Windows Device
Manager, uninstall the USB device driver, and then reinstall it,
following the procedure on page 145.
®
Afatalexception0Aerror It is recommended that you install Windows 2000 Service Pack 3
occurs while installing
USB driver in Windows
2000 Professional.
or later.
®
Error occurs in playback IferroroccurswithUSBconnection,thetransferrateisnotsufficient.
of DVD video camera/
recorder on PC.
It is recommended that you use a USB terminal conforming to
USB2.0 when connecting the DVD video camera/recorder.
Application is not
normally run on PC.
Turn the PC and DVD video camera/recorder off, and try again.
Error occurs during
writing to DVD-R disc.
The temperature of DVD video camera/recorder is too high due to
continuous operation.
Disconnect the DVD video camera/recorder from PC once, remove
the disc from the DVD video camera/recorder, and then turn it off.
After a few moments, connect them again and write to a brand-new
disc.
Transfer of images stops. ConnecttheDVDvideocamera/recordertoanotherUSBterminalof
PC.IfyourPCisadesktoptype,itisrecommendedthatyouuseUSB
terminal on the back of PC. If you are using USB2.0 extended card,
it is also recommended that you install the newest version driver
provided by each USB2.0 card maker.
DVD-RAM/R/RW drive This problem may be solved if the software related to DVD-RAM/R/
built into PC cannot be RW of your PC is upgraded, or if the UDF driver is uninstalled.
®
used after the provided However, with Windows 98 Second Edition / Me / 2000
software has been
installed.
Professional, uninstalling the UDF driver will make it impossible for
the JPEG stills recorded on DVD-RAM of this DVD video camera/
recorder to be read by the PC.
DVD-R disc cannot be
played back on DVD-
MovieAlbumSE.
DVD-MovieAlbumSE does not support playback or data read on
DVD-R disc: Use generally available DVD video playback software
to play back DVD-R disc on PC.
148
Error appears when
starting DVD-
Make sure that your PC display adapter (video card) conforms to
DirectX8.1.
MovieAlbumSE.
176
Reference
page
Symptom
Cause and Correction
Videowrittentoharddisk DVD-MovieAlbumSE cannot edit DVD-VR data stored on hard disk
of PC cannot be edited of PC: Copy the data to another DVD-RAM disc and then edit it.
on DVD-MovieAlbum
copy tool.
Movies are not
recognized by
MakesurethepowerswitchofthisDVDvideocamera/recorderisset
to “O VIDEO”, “N PHOTO” or “P PHOTO”.
application in PC.
The DISC EJECT button While the DVD video camera/recorder is connected to PC, use
isnotvalidwhentheDVD Explorertoright-clicktheDVDvideocamera/recorderdriveiconand
videocamera/recorderis execute “Eject”.
connected to PC.
If DVD-MovieAlbumSE is running, clicking the eject button on DVD-
MovieAlbumSEwillopenthecoverofdiscinsertionblockofthisDVD
video camera/recorder: Remove the disc.
When the time stamp of The file system of this DVD video camera/recorder is operated on
file in DVD-RAM is
viewed on PC, it is
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), and time lag information has not
been set. With Windows as of January, 2004, the time stamp of file
®
different from the actual viewed on Explorer looks different from the actual recording time.
recording time.
The actual recording time will appear for date/time indication on
playback screen.
When DVD-
AdiscotherthanDVD-RAMisloadedindrive:DVD-MovieAlbumSE
cannot be used for media other than DVD-RAM.
MovieAlbumSE is
started, “Disc in Drive X:
cannot be used”
appears.
Click the “Preference” button in the dialog box, click the “Device
Setting” tab to choose the drive where DVD-RAM disc is loaded in
the “Drive Select” column, and then click “OK”.
An image that should
have been recorded
Click the “Preference” button at top right of DVD-MovieAlbumSE
screen, click the “Device Setting” tab to choose the drive where
does not appear when DVD-RAMdiscisloadedinthe“DriveSelect”column, andthenclick
DVD-MovieAlbumSE is “OK”.
started.
“DISC ERROR” appears A disc that was write-protected using the write-protect setting tool
when releasing write-
protect.
(WPTOOL) equipped with the UDF driver on the CD-ROM provided
with this DVD video camera/recorder cannot be released on this
DVD video camera/recorder as is. Use the write-protect setting tool
on PC to release the write-protect.
“USBNTMAP.SYS not
found” appears while
installing USB driver.
You have designated a folder which is different from that for
Windows when installing USB driver: Designate the correct folder.
®
No USB HS (high speed) Make sure that you have already installed the driver provided with
connection even when the USB2.0 card.
152
USB2.0 card is used.
You will need to install the driver provided by USB2.0 card maker in
order to operate the USB2.0 card at HS (high speed).
The “capture” function of The “capture” function of MyDVD is only for DVD camera with i.Link
MyDVD is unavailable. connection: It is not available on this DVD video camera/recorder.
Use DVD-MovieAlbumSE to import the images recorded on DVD-
RAM disc into the PC.
177
Reference
page
Symptom
Cause and Correction
Executing “Export” on
DVD-MovieAlbumSEwill
interrupt reading
midway.
Do not choose “Simple Export”: If you do, reading will stop midway.
Whenexecuting“Export” • If stills are included in the range of “export”, it may take more time
onDVD-MovieAlbumSE, because data must be re-encoded and read.
it will take time to read. • If “Divide by Maker” is not chosen, it may take some time because
152
data will be read while being re-encoded.
®
“Hardware Removal”
results in error.
Exit Windows once, and then disconnect the DVD video camera/
®
recorder.IfyourPCusesWindows 2000Professional,theproblem
may be solved if you install Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 or later.
®
178
Miscellaneous
Symptom
Reference
page
Cause and Correction
Powerdoesnotcomeon, Execute system reset (press the RESET button).
181
ornooperationoccursby
pressing button.
Has the DVD video camera/recorder been subjected to impact?
The DVD video camera/recorder could be damaged. Consult your
dealer.
The date and time are
incorrect.
Has the DVD video camera/recorder been left unused for a long
period of time?
The internal backup memory battery may be discharged:
Charge it.
37
106
Noscenecanbedeleted. Is the cursor placed on the scene to be deleted?
Iftheselectedscene(framedinred)exists,thatscenewillbedeleted
even if you use yellow cursor to select any scene. Check the colors
of cursors and bar graph on the thumbnail screen.
Disc cannot be removed. Did you detach the battery or AC adapter/charger before setting the
power switch to “POWER OFF”?
43, 48
34
Connect the battery or AC adapter/charger, set the power switch to
“O VIDEO” and then “POWER OFF”, and remove the disc.
DVD video camera/
recorder cannot be
operated from remote
control.
Is the remote control pointed at the infrared receiver on DVD video
camera/recorder?
Point it at the infrared receiver to operate the DVD video camera/
recorder.
Is the infrared receiver on DVD video camera/recorder exposed to
direct sunlight or strong fluorescent light, etc.?
The remote control cannot operate the DVD video camera/recorder
when strong light strikes the infrared receiver. Adjust the place or
angle of the DVD video camera/recorder.
34
Is there battery in the remote control?
Also check the polarities of battery. The battery could be dead: Try
replacing it.
33
48
Is the DVD video camera/recorder powered?
Turn it on.
179
Reference
page
Symptom
Cause and Correction
Is disc correctly inserted?
Was disc inserted from wrong direction?
Remove the disc and then reinsert it.
Disc cover cannot be
closed.
44
Is disc inserted in wrong orientation?
Remove the disc, and then reinsert it.
44
Connect a fully charged battery or AC adapter/charger, and then
turn the DVD video camera/recorder on.
39, 43
Cover will not open.
Did you disconnect the battery or AC adapter/charger during
removal of disc? Reconnect the battery or AC adapter/charger, and
then turn the DVD video camera/recorder on.
40, 43
Operatingsoundisheard Thissoundisheardbecausethedisciscyclicallyoperatedanddoes
cyclically. not indicate a fault.
Some vibrations are felt These vibrations or sound are caused by disc drive: This does not
or slight sound is heard indicate a fault.
from mechanism.
180
System Reset
If the DVD video camera/recorder does not operate normally, perform “System Reset”: The DVD video
camera/recordermayrecovertonormal.“SystemReset”willresetallsettingstofactorydefaults.Thedate
and time will also be reset: Set the date and time again before using the DVD video camera/recorder.
1
Set the power switch to “POWER OFF” to turn
the DVD video camera/ reorder off.
Detach the battery or AC adapter/ charger.
2
Use a fine tipped pen to hold down the reset
button for several seconds.
All settings will be reset.
Note:
Do not press the reset button with undue force.
●List of setting items
Setting
method
Item
Default
Camera FunctionsSetup Program AE
Auto
Auto
On
P. 90
P. 91
White Bal.
ElS
P. 93
Dig.Zoom
40×
P. 56
MIC.Filter
Off
P. 93
16:9
Record Functions Setup VIDEO Mode
Quality
Off
P. 94
FINE
FINE
CAMERA
Field
Off
P. 96
P. 97
Input Source
P. 98
PHOTO Input
P. 98
Self Timer
P. 99
OSD Output
On
P. 100
P. 38
Date Setup
LCD Setup
Date Mode
Date Set
M/D/Y
1/1/2004 12:00AM
P. 37
Brightness
Color Level
Beep
P. 101
P. 101
P. 102
P. 102
P. 103
P. 103
P. 159
Initial Setup
On
Power Save
Record LED
Language
Demo Mode
Off
On
English
Auto
* Some items will not appear depending on the disc or card inserted.
181
Major Specifications
CCD
DZ-MV550A: 1/4-inch interlaced
DZ-MV580A: 1/3.8-inch interlaced
Total number of pixels
DZ-MV550A approx. 680,000
DZ-MV580A approx. 1,020,000
Number of effective pixels
DZ-MV550A Movie:approx. 340,000
Still: approx. 340,000
DZ-MV580A Movie:approx. 400,000
(approx. 530,000 when 16:9 is set)
Still: approx. 960,000
Lens
DZ-MV550A: F1.8-2.8, f = 1/16"-1-1/2" (2.1-37.8 mm)
DZ-MV580A: F1.8-2.4, f = 3/16"-1-1/2" (3.8-38 mm)
Filter diameter: 1-7/16" (37 mm); thread pitch: 0.75 mm
Focus
Zoom
Auto/Manual
Optical 18× (DZ-MV550A), Optical 10x (DZ-MV580A), (40×-
500x (DZ-MV550A), 240x (DZ-MV580A) with digital zoom
added) 40x for still
Required minimum illumination
Viewfinder
0.3 lx : When Low Light mode is selected
0.33-inch color TFT (approx. 110,000 pixels)
2.5-inch color TFT (approx. 120,000 pixels)
Electronic type
LCD monitor
Electronic image stabilizer
Shutter speed
1/60 - 1/4000 second (movie)
Still recording only
Self-timer recording
External microphone jack
ø3.5 mm stereo mini-jack: (a plug-in power type microphone
cannot be used)
Recording mode
Movie (with sound)
Still (with DVD-RAM disc, SD memory card, MultiMediaCard)
Maximum
recordable time
(per side)
DVD-RAM disc
DVD-R disc
approx. 18 minutes (XTRA)
approx. 30 minutes (FINE)
approx. 60 minutes (STD)
approx. 30 minutes (FINE)
approx. 60 minutes (STD)
approx. 30 minutes (LPCM)
Maximumnumberof DVD-RAM disc
999. However, if movies and stills are mixed on one disc, the
recordable number will decrease.
recordable stills
(per side)
SD memory card
DZ-MV550A approx. 220 (in FINE mode)
(when using 32 MB card) DZ-MV580A approx. 50 (in FINE mode)
Variesdependingontherecordingqualityandthetypeofcard.
(P. 30)
182
Recording format
DVD-RAM disc
Movie: ConformingtoDVDvideorecording(DVD-VR)format
(MPEG Audio layer 2)
Still:
Simultaneous recording, conforming to DVD video
recording (DVD-VR) standard (704 × 480 pixels) and
JPEG (DZ-MV550A: 640 × 480 pixels, DZ-MV580A:
1280 × 960 pixels*)
* External input: 640 × 480 pixels
DVD-R disc
Card
Movie: Conforming to DVD video format
(when MPEG Audio layer 2 or LPCM* is selected)
Still:
Conforming to JPEG(DZ-MV550A:640×480 pixels,
DZ-MV580A: 1280 × 960 pixels*) standard
* External input: 640 × 480 pixels
Audio playback format
Recording medium
MPEG Audio layer 2, linear PCM, Dolby AC3
8 cm DVD-RAM disc (conforming to DVD-RAM Ver. 2.1)
8 cm DVD-R disc (conforming to DVD-R for General Ver. 2.0)
SD memory card, MultiMediaCard
Jacks
Video/audio input/output × 1, External microphone input × 1,
PC connection terminal (connected to PC USB port) × 1
Battery system
Lithium-ion
Power consumption
When recording with LCD monitor off (DVD-RAM disc used)
DZ-MV550A approx. 4.1W (in FINE mode)
DZ-MV580A approx. 4.4W (in FINE mode)
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
approx. 2-1/2" × 3-1/2" × 5-3/4"
(64 × 89 × 146 mm) (excluding projections)
Operating temperature (humidity)
32-104 °F (0-40 °C) (less than 80%).
32-86 °F (0-30 °C) when connected to PC
Storage temperature
Weight
-4-140 °F (-20-60 °C)
DZ-MV550A approx. 490 g (without battery or disc)
DZ-MV580A approx. 500 g (without battery or disc)
Total weight when recording
Provided accessories
DZ-MV550A approx. 575 g
DZ-MV580A approx. 585 g
ACadapter/charger, battery, AV/Sinput/outputcable, infrared
remote control, Lithium battery for remote control, lens cap,
lens cap string, shoulder strap, power cable, DC power cord,
Software CD-ROM, PC connection cable, Single-sided 8 cm
DVD-RAM disc (in Round DVD Holder)
* The MPEG Audio layer 2 format is an option of DVD video standard. If your DVD player does not conform to MPEG
Audio layer 2, record in LPCM mode and the finalized DVD-R disc can later be played back on that DVD player.
183
To Order in the United States
BY PHONE
Service Hotline:1-800-HITACHI
(1-800-448-2244)
To Order in the Canada
FOR AUTHORIZED HITACHI SERVICE
FACILITY IN CANADA
Please consult the following telephone number
Service Direct: 1-800-HITACHI
(1-800-448-2244)
Choisissez les articles qui vous conviennent et
passez commande.
Service Direct: 1-800-HITACHI
(1-800-448-2244)
TO ORDER ACCESSORIES
(Canada only)
POUR COMMANDER DES
ACCESSOIRES
BY PHONE
(Canada seulement)
PAR TÉLÉPHONE
HITACHI CANADA LTD.
DIGITAL MEDIA DIVISION
2495 Meadowpine Blvd.
Mississauga, Ontario
L5N 6C3
Service Direct: 1-800-HITACHI
(1-800-448-2244)
HITACHI CANADA LTD.
DIGITAL MEDIA DIVISION
2495 Meadowpine Blvd.
Mississauga, Ontario
L5N 6C3
Service Direct: 1-800-HITACHI
(1-800-448-2244)
during business hours
Monday-Friday
Saturday
EST 9:00am-7:00pm
EST 9:00am-5:00pm
Durant les heures de bureau:
Lundi au vendredi 9:00am-7:00pm (h.n.e)
Samedi
9:00am-5:00pm (h.n.e)
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
with FCC Rules for Electromagnetic Compatibility
Products:
Models:
DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDER
DZ-MV550A/DZ-MV580A
Trade Name: HITACHI
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Responsible Party: HITACHI AMERICA, LTD.
HOME ELECTRONICS DIVISION
900 Hitachi Way
Chula Vista, CA 91914-3556 U.S.A
Tel: 619-591-5200
184
Index
Detail (scene) ................................................. 122
Dig. Zoom ........................................................ 56
Diopter control .................................................. 34
Disc ................................................................ 25
Available .................................................. 25
Capacity .................................................. 29
Finalize Disc ........................................... 137
Format ................................................... 135
Handling .................................................. 27
Protect ................................................... 134
Update Control Info. ................................. 136
DISC EJECT button .......................................... 46
Disc guide ........................................................ 44
Display ............................................................ 52
Information LCD ........................................ 52
Scenes information .................................. 122
Viewfinder ................................................ 34
Divide ............................................................ 117
DPOF ............................................................ 120
DVD player ........................................ 79, 80, 160
DVD-R ............................................................ 25
DVD-RAM ........................................................ 25
DVD video format ........................................... 160
DVD video recorder ................................... 79, 160
DVD video recording (DVD-VR) format ........ 30, 160
Numerics
16:9 ................................................................ 94
240x (Dig. Zoom) .............................................. 56
40x (Dig. Zoom) ................................................ 56
500x (Dig. Zoom) .............................................. 56
8 cm DVD-R disc .............................................. 25
8 cm DVD-RAM disc ......................................... 25
A
AC adapter/charger ........................................... 43
ACCESS/PC indicator ................................. 49, 50
Add (edit) ....................................................... 129
Advanced mode ............................................... 87
All programs ................................................... 123
Auto (program AE) ............................................ 90
Auto-focus ....................................................... 71
AV input/output jack .......................................... 77
B
Backlight correction ........................................... 51
Battery ............................................................ 39
Attaching to DVD video camera/recorder ...... 40
Charging .................................................. 39
Recordable time on DVD video camera/
recorder ................................................ 41
E
Removing from DVD video camera/
Edit (play List) ................................................ 129
EIS ................................................................. 93
EXPOSURE button ........................................... 73
Exposure control ............................................... 73
External microphone jack ................................... 76
recorder ................................................ 40
Setting Up ................................................ 39
BATTERY EJECT button ................................... 40
Beep ............................................................. 102
Black & White fade .......................................... 115
Brightness ..................................................... 101
F
Fade ............................................................. 115
FIELD (PHOTO Input) ....................................... 98
Finalize Disc .................................................. 137
FINE (VIDEO Mode) .......................................... 96
FOCUS button .................................................. 71
Format Disc ................................................... 135
FRAME (PHOTO Input) ..................................... 98
Frame advance/Frame back ............................... 59
FULL AUTO button ........................................... 74
C
Camera Functions Setup ................................... 90
Capacity ........................................................ 134
Card
Available .................................................. 28
Capacity .......................................... 30, 134
Category ................................................ 138
Format ................................................... 135
Handling .................................................. 28
Quality ..................................................... 97
Card Access indicator ........................................ 50
CHARGE indicator ............................................ 39
Cleaning ........................................................ 158
Color Level .................................................... 101
Connecting to TV .............................................. 77
Copy ............................................................. 118
Create ........................................................... 126
G
Go To (during playback) ..................................... 61
Go To (on Disc Navigation) .............................. 133
H
Hand strap ....................................................... 31
Howling ................................................... 77, 161
D
I
Date and time ................................................... 37
Date setup ....................................................... 37
Defaults ......................................................... 104
Delete (edit) ................................................... 130
Delete (play list) .............................................. 132
Delete (scene) ........................................ 111, 129
Demo Mode ................................................... 159
Information display mode ................................... 52
Infrared receiver ............................................... 34
Infrared sensor ............................................... 161
Initial Setup .................................................... 102
Input Source .................................................... 98
185
L
S
Language .......................................................103
Laser pickup block .....................................46, 161
Lens cap ..........................................................32
Lens cap string attachment hole ..........................17
Linear PCM ........................................35, 80, 161
Lock ..............................................................119
Lock switch ......................................................18
Low Light (Program AE) .....................................90
LPCM (VIDEO Mode) .........................................96
Sand & Snow (Program AE) ................................90
Scene
Combine .................................................116
Delete ....................................................111
Detail .....................................................122
Divide ....................................................117
Fade ......................................................115
Move ......................................................131
Select ....................................................121
Skip .......................................................114
Searching for image ...........................................59
Select (Scene) ................................................108
SELECT button ...............................................108
Self Timer .........................................................99
Shoulder Strap ..................................................32
Skip (Scene) ...................................................114
Skip playback ...................................................60
Slide Show .....................................................139
Sports (Program AE) ..........................................90
Spotlight (Program AE) .......................................90
STD (VIDEO Mode) ...........................................96
Stereo microphone ............................................49
Submenu .......................................................112
Switch (play list) ..............................................127
Switch (program) .............................................123
M
MENU button ....................................................89
MF ..................................................................71
MIC.Filter .........................................................93
Move .............................................................131
O
Optical 10× zoom lens ........................................17
Optical 18x zoom lens ........................................56
OSD Output ....................................................100
P
PHOTO Input ....................................................98
Play (play list) .................................................127
Play (program) ................................................124
Play list ..........................................................126
Add scenes .............................................128
Add scenes (submenu) .............................129
Create ....................................................126
Delete ....................................................132
Delete scenes .........................................129
Delete scenes (submenu) .........................130
Move .....................................................131
Play .......................................................127
Select scenes (submenu) ..........................130
Switch ....................................................127
Title .......................................................132
Portrait (Program AE) .........................................90
Power Save ....................................................102
Power switch ....................................................48
Program .........................................................123
Play .......................................................124
Switch ....................................................123
Title .......................................................124
Program AE ......................................................90
Protect Disc ....................................................134
T
Tele-conversion lens ..........................................57
Thumbnail ......................................................106
Title (play list) .................................................132
Title (program) ................................................124
U
UDF2.01 format ......................................156, 162
Update Control Info. .........................................136
V
Video flash .......................................................75
VIDEO Mode ....................................................96
FINE ........................................................96
LPCM ......................................................96
STD .........................................................96
XTRA .......................................................96
Video selector .....................................84, 95, 162
Vol. button ........................................................58
W
Q
White Bal. .........................................................91
White fade ......................................................115
Wide conversion lens .........................................57
Wipe fade .......................................................115
Quality (Card) ...................................................97
Quick mode ......................................................63
QUICK MODE switch .........................................87
R
X
Record button ...................................................49
Recording indicator ..........................................103
Remote control .................................................33
Repeat Play ....................................................138
Reset .............................................................104
settings ..................................................104
system ...................................................181
RESET button .................................................181
XTRA (VIDEO Mode) .........................................96
Z
Zoom lever .......................................................56
186
Be sure to read the following before opening
the package of CD-ROM
This Agreement will take effect at the moment you open the package of the storage device (CD-ROM) provided with
this product, if you agree to the terms herein.
If you do not accept the terms of this Agreement, immediately return the unopened package of storage medium and
enclosed materials (printed matter,externalpackage,and allothers)to your dealer, or return only the package ofstorage
medium to your dealer.
Consult your dealer for any refund on the unused product. However, if only the package of storage medium is returned,
no refund is possible.
This License Agreement certifies that you were granted license in the past.
License Agreement
Article 1 Grant of License
Hitachi, Ltd. grants you the following rights for the following products (to be referred to as “This Software” hereafter)
that you have obtained with this Agreement:
(a) You may use This Software only on a single piece ofequipment.However,ifthis equipment cannot be used because
of mechanical problem, you may temporarily use This Software on another piece of equipment.
(b) Although This Software contains several components that can be run on computer as independent functions, all
components are licensed as a single product: You may not, by any means, use these components on different
computers at the same time.
Article 2 Copyrights
The copyrights of This Software, attached manual, etc. are owned by the following corporations, and are protected by
copyright laws in Japan and USA, as well as by other intellectual property and international properties:
Name of Software
Copyright Owners
USB device driver for DVDCAM
Hitachi, Ltd.
UDF driver (DVD-RAM driver)
DVD-MovieAlbumSE
MyDVD
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Sonic Solutions
Article 3 Other Rights and Limitations
(a) You may not copy This Software or any of the printed materials attached, except for duplications to provide back-
up or storage.
(b) Use of This Software by third parties is prohibited, whether by transferring, renting, leasing, lending, moving, or
any other measures.
(c) You may not decompile or disassemble this Software.
(d) Duplication and/ or distribution of any files on this storage medium for commercial use is prohibited.
Article 4 Quality Assurance
Under no circumstances will Hitachi, Ltd., Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. or Sonic Solutions accept any
responsibility for any damages you may incur from using or being unable to use This Software (including, but not
limited to, loss of business profit, interruption of business, loss of business information, or other monetary damages).
Article 5 Termination of Agreement
If you fail to comply with the terms of this Agreement, Hitachi, Ltd., Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. and Sonic
Solutions reserve the right to terminate the Agreement. In such a case, you will be obliged to discard all copies of This
Software and its components.
Article 6 Prioritized License Agreement
When some software programs are installed, the license agreements will be displayed (to be referred to as online license
agreement).
If the online license agreement conflicts with this Agreement, the online license agreement shall have a priority.
187
|